Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http: //books .google .com/I

3SLH''7.Sli7

Stbrarg

THE BEQUEST OF

PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT
1880— 1926

/ 2/

PALI GEAMMAE, i

A

PHONETIC AND MORFHOLOQIOAL SEETOH

OF THE , ^

PALI LANGUAGE

V/ith an Introductory Essay on its form and Character

J. MINAYEFP^

Professor at the University of St. Petersburg,

1872i

TRANSLATED FROM RUSSIAN INTO FRENCH

BY

M. STANISLAS CUYARD,

Private Tutar at the Fraetioal School of High Studies Fariai

1874?

Rendered into Englisli from the Frencli and rearranged wltli some
modifioations ^nd additions for the use of English Students

BY

CHAS. OEO. ADAMS,

Head Master Qovenunent Biglx Schobl, Maulmatoi ftridsh Bfinxiah,

18 82.

32, (^^ ,57. 7

M^. ,. : - rr'j.EGE LIBRARY

•"•c; »:■: l37ateof
•CHAixcr ..c-.::vvELL ijinman

MARCH 15, 1941

tzTfrirr^

X^Ji^^

r

PREAMBLR

The ofily Pali Qrammar that existed prior to that of M. Minajeff
(1) (we mean Glough's Grammar), is long since ont of print and scarcely
to be met with at the present day. On the other hand, the fact of M.
MinayeflT^ work being written in Bassian, renders it inaccessible to many
scholars. It is for this reason that we have decided to translate it into
Frendi, a language which has already rendered service to important
works on Pali, among them, the chief of all', the eelebrated Essay of
Burnouf and Lassen^ and the fine edition of Elaccayana^ published recently
by M. Emil. Senart. (2).

It is not for us to criticise the work of M. Minayeff ; but we
camnot refrain from noting, for the attention of our reader9, the learned
introduction in which the author asserts his views upon the structure of
Pali and Buddhism in genarid.

We ought also to say, that, although he announces it as ai
simple sketch, his grammar has over other works that have preceded itr the
advantage of containing a greater nitmber of forms*, and moreover, fur*
nishes the correspondence of Pali forms with Sanskrit onesi a correspond- P. ir,
ence if not indispensable, at least, very useful, since the study of Pali i8>
in some respect, as it were, an accompaniment to that of Sanskrit.

We have but a few words to add relatively to the manner in
which we have understood and endeavoured to fulfil the task of a trans*
later. The material order has been scrupulously preserved and^ beyond
the corrections of typographical errors not removed by the author, we
have not introduced into the original text,, any modification which may
not have been pointed out to us by M. Minayeff himself*

M. Minayeff has forwarded us his additions and corrections^ and
been able to revise more than a half of the proof-sheets. We are therefore
permitted to state^ that the present translation of the Phonetic and M^rpho*
logical sketch of the Pali Language may be regarded as a second edition,
improved. It would have been such on a liEtrger scale, had the difficult
and slowness of communication with Russia not placed an insuperable
obstacle to the continued intercourse between the author and the translator.

St. GUYARD.

(1) SU Pekrsburg^ 1872. (2) Faria, Bmest, Xer(ma;,1871| Eg^raei from the

AmHc Journal.

INTRODUCTION.

Scientific researches in Sanskrit were begun in Europe a short
while after the discovery of that language, and one cannot decline to con-
sider, as^ one of the most important results obtained by comparative
grammar, the notions, nowadays admitted by every one, of a family of
Indo-European languages, the eastern traces of which survive in India,
and the western in Ireland.

The explanation of a series of grammatical phenomena by the
analysis of the forms of language,, the laws established for the diflferent
transformations of one sound in various languages, the examination of
the vocabulary according to the results aflTorded by this scientific method,
convince us that the nations who actually speak the Indo-European
dialects, once formed, in a most remote antiquity and far beyond the limits
of history, but one people, whose language was probably divided into
numerous^ dialects closely related. Gradually, at diflerent epochs, tribe*
separated themselves from the great family, individualised themselves, and
emigrated in several directions.

x/

As to the questbn of ascertaining, where this people primatively
dwelt, science cannot yet positively answer for want of data ; yet some hy-
potheses, more or less ingenious have been put forward respecting the cradle
P. II. of the Indo-Europeans. It has been sought for in India, upon the heights P. iL
of Pamir, in the centre of Germany, in southern Russia : all these hypo-
theses rest merely upon ingenious conjectures, and will, in consequence,
persuade none but their own authors; they rest, by no means, upon scientific
bases, but have been partly im^a^agined (perhaps unknown to the authors ^
themselves), under the influence of subjective impressions.

It is known that the mo&t ancient traditions respecting the human
race, as well as the Semitic conceptions of a golden age, are localised in
Asia ; it is thence too, that at an historic era,^ there issued migrations that
came to colonise Europe. To these facts are added,, quite recently, the
discovery of Sanskrit, and the knowledge of the celebrated first chapter of
the Vendidadt. the contents of which ai-e geographical. All that tends to
determine the question of the cradle of the Indo-Europeans in favour o£

INTRODUCTION.

Scientific researches in Sanskrit were begun in Europe a short
while after the discovery of that language, and one cannot decline to con-
sider, as^ one of the most important results obtained by comparative
grammar, the notions, nowadays admitted by every one, of a family of
Indo-Eurapean languages, the eastern traces of which survive in India,
and the western in Ireland.

The explanation of a series^ of grammatical phenomena by the
analysis of the forms of language,, the laws established for the diflferent
transformations of one sound in various languages, the examination of
the vocabulary according to the results afforded by this scientific method,
convince us that the nations who actually speak the Indo-European
dialects^ once formed, in a most remote antiquity and far beyond the limits
of history, but one people, whose language was probably divided inta
numerous^ dialects closely related. Gradually, at diflerent epochs, tribe*
separated themselves from the great family, individualised themselves^ and
emigrated in several directions.

As to the questbn of ascertaining, where thiis people primatively v/^
dwelt, science cannot yet positively answer for want of data ; yet some hy-
potheses, more or less ingenious have been put forward re&peeting the cradle
P. n. of the Indo-Europeans. It has been sought for in India, upon the heights P. iL.
of Pamir, in the centre of Germany, in southern Russia : all these hypo-
theses rest merely upon ingenious conjiectures, and will, in consequence,
persuade none but their own authors; they rest, by no means, upon scientific
bases, but have been partly im^a^agined (perhaps unknown to the authors ^
themselves), under the influence of subjective impressions.

It is known that the mo&t ancient traditions respecting the human
race, as well as the Semitic conceptions of a golden age, are localised in
Asia ; it is thence too, that at an historic era,^ there issued migrations that
came to colonise Europe. To these facts are added,, quite recently, the
discovery of Sanskrit, and the knowledge of the celebrated first chapter of
the Vendidadf the contents of which are geographical. All that tends to
determine the question of the cradle of the Indo-Europeans in favour of

aSLH-l.Sl^J

Stbrarn

THE BEQUEST OF

PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT
1880— 1926

INTRODUCTION.

Scientific researches in Sanskrit were begun in Europe a short
while after the discovery of that language, and one cannot decline to con-
sider, as^ one of the most important results obtained by comparative
grammar, the notions, nowadays admitted by every one, of a family of
ludo-European languages, the eastern traces of which survive in ludia^
and the western m Ireland.

The explanation af a series of grammatical phenomena by the
analysis of the forms of language,, the laws established for the different
transformations of one sound in various languages, the examination of
the vocabulary according to the results afforded by this scientific method,
convince us that the nations who actually speak the Indo-Europeaa
dialects^ once formed, in a most remote antiquity and far beyond the limits
of history, bat one people, whose language was probably divided into
numerous^ dialects closely related. Gradually, at diflerent epochs, tribes
separated themselves from the great family, individualised themselves^ and
emigrated in several directions.

As to the question of ascertaining, where this people primatively V^
dwelt, science cannot yet positively answer for want of data ; yet some hy-
potheses, more or less ingenious have been put forward respecting the cradle
P. II. of the Indo-Europeans. It has been sought for in India, upon the heights P. ii;.
of Pamir, in the centre of Germany, in southern Bussia : all these hypo-
theses rest merely upon ingenious conjectures, and will, in consequence^
persuade none but their own authors; they rest, by no means, upon scientific
bases, but have been partly im^jagined (perhaps unknown to the authors ^
themselves), under the influence of subjective impressions.

It is known that the mo&t ancient traditions respecting the human
race, as well as the Semitic conceptions of a golden age, are localised in
Asia ; it is thence too, that at an historic era,^ there issued migrations that
came to colonise Europe. To these facts are added^ quite recently, the
discovery of Sanskrit, and the knowledge of the celebrated first chapter of
the Vendidadf the contents of which are geographical. All that tends to
determine the question of the cradle of the Indo-Europeans ia favour of

t H ]

Asiai it 18 of a country wliose inhabitants were in possession of the most
ancient monuments of literature ; it is thence or from the borderinn; coun-
tries, in which the first Indo-European songs are even to this day preserved
:as sacred things, that the European nations too must needs have issued.

Thus, it is held, the Aryans are either from the table-land of
Central Asia or India itself. {Curzon), The opponents ot the Asiatic origin
of the European nations supported their h}potl>e?es upon facts of another
nature. They said, since neither the flora nor fauna of Asia exhibit names
common to the languages of Europe, and the words, that designate the
different specimens of the one and of the other kingdom, are of later crea-
tion or do not present etymological resemblances in the different languages,
they could not be made the common heritage of all the Indo-Europeans,
transmitted before their separation. As for placing the cradle of the Indo-
Europeans in India, there was no necessity even to think of it, since it was
acknowledged that, although the recollections of the Hindus themselves
might not go back to a very remote, antiquity, still in certain legends, some
P. in. reminiscences were found of successive immigrations of Aryans into
India. On the other hand, the existence of aborigines upon the heights
of Pamir seems almost impossible, owing to physical considerations.
Consequently it was much more feasible to allow that the Aryans had not
come into Europe, but, that, on the contrary, it is in Europe that their
primative abode should be sought for, and, notably, in the centre of
Germany (Geiger), or in southern Russia (Latham)^ i*. iii.

If the uncertainty of the conjectures put forth respeciang the
place that was the point of departure of the Indo-Europeans, the place in
which they would have lived a life in common — that about which we again
find traces in their language, in their cosmological conceptions, in the rudi-
ments of their domestic organization, and in their civilization — must be
acknowledged, another order of facts, deduced, themselves too, from
the comparison of languages, sheds a light upon the question of know»-
ing, in what succession each branch was, detached from the parent trunk,
and also of knowing, which are the branches among the Aryans that
lived the longest together.

It is not doubtful, for instance, that the Aryans of Asia, (we mean
the Iranians and the Hindus), still lived a common life, a long time after

t Hi ]

the greater number of the European branches had become detached from
them. Not only are we able to convince ourselves of it by an examination
of the vocabulary and grammar of the ancient Bacfcrian and Sanskrit, but,
in the my tholo«j:y, religion, and populur legends of the Iranians and Hindus
moreover, we discover certain parties who do not appear in ths mythology,
religion, and legends of the other allied nations. And therefore, we are to
recognise in the destinies of the Iranians and Hindus a period of life in
common, which has probably endured longer than among other nations.
Subsequent to events unknown to us, the Iranians and Hindus separated
and settled in different countries.

The proof of words, etymologically identical, having assumed dia- P. iy.
metrically opposed acceptations ffor example, deva,gi}d; daeva, the adver*
sary of the gods) does not in the mean time, however, give the right of
supposing, that' they wei-e religious questions which excited dissensions
between these two peoples of the same race and caused their separa-^
tion, (a,) because, by the side of words analogous to those which we are
about to mention, there are found among them a much larger number
which are absolutely related to one another in the religion of the ancient
P. IV. Persians and in the most ancient literary production of the Hindus, — the
Vedas. A quantity of identical words referring to worship or names of
heroes regarded as sacred, as well in the Vedio hymns as in the fragments
handed down to us of the sacred writings of the ancient Bactrians, leads us
to believe, that at a distant period, during the prehistoric unity of the two
Aryan races (the Iranians and the Hindus), the religious conscience
enlarged itself, and, that the mythological conceptions regarding the
universe, were, up to a certain point, systematised. Those who are
acquainted with Iranian and Vedic mythology will not charge our assertion
with exaggeration. But here it seems to me indispensable, to call attention
once more to a point of contrast in these two mythologies, on which, no
one to my knowledge, has yet dwelt*

It is on good grounds, that the dualism, founded on myths,
common to all the Aryans, concerning the combat between light aud
darkness, is considered as the most characteristic feature of the ancient
Iranian religion. Rudiments of dualism are also to be met with in the ancient

(a). Spiegelf EranUche AlterihumBhundef I. 455.

k..

I It ]

literature of the Hindus. In fact, in India, this religious conception has
not been elaborated to the same degree as in the Aveata ; but some parti-
culars lead us to think that they are very ancient.

We know, that, m the Avesfa {Vendidad, xxii. 5), the principle
of evil or Angromainyu (b) receives the epithet of mairyo, mortal, serpent. P. v.
That word is derived from the root mar, to die, with tte suffix i/a. In
Pehlevi and in Parsi, the same word has the form mar and simply means
serpent : {mdrdddsch, i. e. having serpents on the shoulders, is one of the
frequent epithets oi Zohdic) (c). From the same root ;war, to die, comes also
the Sanskrit word Mdra^ the name of a demon who pkys the principal role
in primitive Buddhism, and which the legends frequently mention in con-
nection with the life of /Sa/iy«wtm/, and,, in. particular, those which have
been known as the most ancient. Rven as J^aratushtra struggles with
Angromainyu and gains the victory over him, so Sdkyamuni combats with
Mdra^ and destroys his power {d),

Mara, the god of death (i. e. Maccurdja), is at the same time assimi-
lated to Kdmadeva or the god of love, and it is with the same double cha-
racter that he appears as well in the Dhammapada (e), as in the biographies
of Buddha :

P. V. " In the world, whoever mentions Kdmadeva with various weapons

and arrows of flowers, names the sovereign of the domain of the passionS)
the enemy of salvation, Mdra.^^ (/)»

Ye Kamadevam pravadanti loke citrayudham pushpa(?aram tathaiva I
Katnavacaradhipatim tam eva mokshadvisham Maram udaharanti ||

The enmity of Buddha and Mdra is irreconcilable. It is the
enmity of two contrary principles, excluding one another :

" Begin, go out (of the house), apply yourself to the law of Buddhaj
repel the army oi Death'*'* • (g).

(6). Spiegel, Commentar, I. 47. (c). Spiegel^ Eranische AUerth. I, 532.

(d). See, e. g. the xxi. adh, of Ldlitavistara,

(e). P. 7, 8, 34, 37, 40, 46, 67, 170, 175.

(/). Buddhacarita (Ms. of thQ National Library of Paris , Sarga, xxiii, page

59 <»ii the back). The Ms, reads : KdmapracdrddMpaHm,
{g), Lotus de la Bonne Loi, F, 529.

C y ]

Hardly has Buddha quitted his paternal roof to acconiplish bis
mission, — iho deliverance of the Iiuinan race — wlica Mara commences to
tremble :

'^ If thai one (Buddha), after vanqnishincy me, sbonld announce to P. vi,
tbe world its deliverance, my kingdom (that of Md'd) will become a desert

»>

Yadi by asau mam abbiblmya yati lokaya cSkbyaty apavargamoksbam I
Cunyas tato 'yam visbayo mamadya (A).

Tben commences tboir fio;ht. JUdra has recourse to temptations.
He presents himself to Bnddha in tbe form of a serpent :

'* The criminal Mdra^ eager to terrify tbe lord, to binder bim,
to make the hair of his bead stand with terror, assumes tbe form of a
great serpent and presents himself before bim."

Atha kho Maro papima Bbagavato bbayam kbambbitattam lom*
ahamsam uppadetukamo mahanta7nK sapparajavanna;;i abbinimminitv^
yena Bbagava ten 'upasaAkami. («)•

Then, as tbe king of tbe world, be offers bim tbe sovereignty of
the universe.

** Do not, mortal ! abandon thy paternal roof. In seven days,
tbe jewel-car " (symbol of power) '* will arrive at thy mansion, and thou
Wilt reign over the four great islands as well as over their two thousand
divisions. Retrace thy steps, O mortal !"

Marisa ma nikkbami, ito te sattame divase cakkaratar»am patu-
bhavissati dvisahassaparittadipaparivaranam catunnam mahadfpanam
rajjaw karessasi, nivatta mari.sa'ti aha. (j),

P. VI. Mara repulsed, abandons not bis temptations. He pursues tbe

Buddha "whilst the latter is fasting :

'* Thou art lean and pale. Death bangs over thee. In thee
there are a thousand parts of death and a single one of life. To the
living nothing is more preforAblo than life. Living thou wilt do good

(A). Buddhaf'.arita, ihid.

{%), Sanntittanikdya^ Ms, India Office TAh'ary^ P^f/^ 0^'^ ^^- ^^'
\j), Niddnakathdf in the Jufakdtfhahaihd ( J/«. of the Asiatic Museum of Si. PeteTB<»
burg), also Fausboll [JdtukdttJiavaifnana} p. 63, L 18.

[ vi ]

Works. Thou wilt become chaste. Thou wilt cause sacrifices to be burnt.
And by all these means thou wilt accumulate much merit.'*

Kiso ty^m asi dubbanno santike maranam tava ||

Sahassabhago maranassa ekamso tava jivitam I P. vii.

Jivitejivitaw seyyo jivam punnani kahasi ||

Carato ca te brahmacariyam aggihuttam ca juhato I

FaliQtam ciyate punnaw {k).

When Mara perceives that his temptations are ineffectual, ho
resorts to violence^ but he is still the vanquished in the combat

" I am delivered from every fetter/' said the Buddha, '* I have
delivered myself from celestial fetters, from human fetters, and from the
fetters of Mdra : thou art vanquished, Antaka !" (literally, * tchoputs end
to,' epithet of the god of death).

Pali, — Mutto 'ham sabbapasehi ye dibba ye ca manussa I

Marabandhanamutto 'mhi nihato tvamasi Antaka 'ti ||

Sanskrit, — Mukto 'ham sarvapa^ehi ye divya ye ca manusha i
Evam jauahi paplmam nihato tvam asi Antako || (/).

Then the rays which escape from Buddha, sovereign of the world,
P. VII. extinguish the fire of the eight hells.

Sanjive kalasQtre ca t^pane ca pratapane I
Pra^anto raurave agnir lokanathasya ra^mibhih ||
Avicyam atha samghate pratyekanirayeshu ca (
Prai^anto sarva^o agnir lokanathasya ra^mibhih ||

The later legend has improved on this last incident, and substitut-
ing other names (in particular, in the Karandavj/'dha, Mas, of the British
Museum, Oriental 7, page 7 et seq.) relates the hellward descent of the
Avalokitegvara Bodhisatta (i. e. the sovereign who sees all).

*' As the sovereign of the universe enters a garden laid out with
celestial joys, as easily enters into hell the '^ Av(dokitegvara*\

Yatha kulaputra raja cakravarti divyaratnamaye udyane pravi<?ati ;

" His body receives no taint".

'na ca tasya kaye 'nyathabhavam bhavati.

(k). Fadhdnasutia {Ms. of the Asiatic Society o/LondoUy in the Burmese character)
(l.) Alahdvagga and Mahdvastu {Mst. of the Naiional Library o{ Paris,)

'* Scarcely has he but approached the great hell Avici, when it
cools and the attendants of the god Yama are all seized with consterna-
tiou."

Tadavicau mah^narake samfpatn upasafikramati I F, vii.

Tadavicir mahanarakah Qitabhavam upagacchati I
Tada te Yamapurushah sawvegam apadyante I

" To their sovereign they run to announce the arrival of him
whose body is decked with celestial jewels and upon whose head there is

a crown of tresses of hair (page. 8 jatamukutadharo divyalaftkarabhu —
shitai^ar irah) .

*^ As soon as ' the sovereign who sees all* makes his entry, the
lotuses immediately bloom large like the wheel of a chariot, and the hell
itself, which resembles a vase, is rent asunder/'

tada Qakatacakrapramafiaui padmani pradurbhutani s3, ca kumbh!
visphutita ....

The particulars which we have just cited, are naturally, for the
most part, the work of a modern era ; but the fundamental idea of the
fabrication , the struorgle between the good and the evil principle, and the
name even of the evil principle, Mdra = mairya, evidently go back to a
period prior to the separation of the Iranians and the Hindus.

At this point of the Buddhist cosmogony, therefore, I deem it
necessary to stop.

Tet, neither in India, nor among the Iranians, has the memory
of the people preserved clear notions touching the period of their life in
common. The Hindus, it is known, believe themselves to be the aborigi-
P. VIII. nies of India, fiut the recognition of a confused recollection of an
Extra^Indian origin, in the opinion of the Hindus, which makes the extreme
north a sacred country, is certainly permitted.

It is in that direction that they place the seat of many of their
deities and the abode of bliss. They believe that the good inhabit the
Vttarakuru (Ottorokorra of Ptolemy) country situated to the north of the
Himalayas (perhaps to the east of Kashgar).

In the ancient monuments of Indian literature, the years are

r ^iiJ 1

moreover reckoned by winters (Rtgveda, v. i., 64, 14 ; vi. 4,87). The Aryan
asks the gods for a life of one hundred winters.

The Buddhist representation of the river fi'/f/a could be equally
referred to a like obscure notion of a distant cradle. '* To the north, there
is a deep river, difficult to cross, upon whose banks sparkle mountains of
gold resembling, through their colour, a fire of reeds. On the sides of P.
tliese mountains grow the tagara ( Tuhcrncemon tana cor onaria) . There also
there are other mountains, whoso sides are covered with forests. In ancient
times ten thousand priests lived there." (m.)

17. Uttarena uadi Sida gambhira duratikkama I
Nalaggivanna jotanti sada kaiicanapabbata||

18. Purulhakacclia tagara rulhakaccha vana nagaJ
Tatrasum dasasahassa porana isayo pure ||

The commentator explains the name of that river by the root
sod-hava^ Ho go deep in', and adds, that the water in it was so subtle,
that thb eye of a peacock's plume could not be sustained thereon, but sunk
into it :

• • . .sa hi atisukhnmodaka sukhumatta udakassa antamaso
morapinjam hi tattha patitam na santhati osfditva talam eva gaochati ten'
eva'ssa sida'ti namar;i ahosi

This etymology and this gloss recall whatCtesios has said of the
river Sidd («) upon which nothing floated. Perhaps in the Sidd is to be
seen the Jazartes^ the Silis of the ancients, (o) The most ancient mo-
nument of Indian literature, the liigveda^ chiefly mentions the countries to
the north-west of India. The singers most often celebrate the Sindhu (Indus)
and the rivers that fall into it. It is in eastern Kabulistan (Afghanistan)
and in the Punjab, as for as the Sarasvati, where the hymns were composed.

(m.) JutaJca xxi, 1, 4, (17 18).

(w.) Pliny, xxxi,2 "Otesias tradit Siden vocari staj^nnm in Indis, inqiio
nihil innatct, omnia mer^nntur/' Ctesias relates, Siden is the name given to the stag-
nant sea in India in wliich nothing: floats, everythino; sinks.

(o.) Ukerf.f Geographic der Griechen vnd Romer (Geography of the Greeks and
Romans) iii, 2, 238. "'ilie Scythians called the Silis, the Jnxartes.'' Cf. Jowth. ot
the Royal Asiatic JSoc, of Gt Brit : and Ireland/ new ser. VoL vi. parti, p. 120. *^ Sitd
a name previoasly applied to the Yarkand riTer, or to one of its chief tributaries, the
Sirikol river."

[ « ]

Thence the Aryans spread themselves gradually towards the east and to
the south of the Vindhya range, (p),

P. IX. The recollection of that movement of the Arjans is perpetuated, P. x.

not only in Brahmanio accounts, but also in the later Buddhist writingS|
and in the legends about the genealogy of the Sak^a kings.

They are made to come from Patala {Patdla of Ptolemy), a port
situated at the place, where the Indus divides itself into two great arms
(j), and their genealogy is frequently traced in Buddhist books ^r). All
the writings, however, make the dynasty of the Sakya kings descend
from Mahdsammata, and do not reckon the same number of individuals
between this king and the branch of the Okkdka family which reigned
over Amhattha (s), and whose descendants crossed over to the north of
Bdketa and raised the town of Kapilavatthu,

«* In ancient times, during the first Kalpa (cycle of time), there
" was a king named Mahdsammata, who lived an incalculable number of
** years. He begat Bojo, who begat Vararojo, who begat Kalydno, who
*' begat Vnrakalydno, who begat Uposatha, who begat Mandhdtd, who
•' begat Varamandhdid, Afterwards Varamandhdtd begat Caro, and the
" latter Upacaro or Apacaro, who ruled over the Cetiya country (a. 2) in the
*• town of SotthlvatV^

Thus it is that the genealogy is given in Jdtaka. viii. i, 6.

Atite pathamakappe Mahasammato nama raja asaflkheyyayuko

ahosi. Tassa putto Rojo nama, Kojassa Yararojo nama, tassa Kalyano

P. X. nama, Kalyanassa Varakalyano nama, Varakalyanassa Uposatho n^ma P,

Uposathassa Mandhata nama, Mandhatussa Yaramandhata nama,

(p). The curious question of the primitive extension of the Aryans in India,
10 examined in detail by Muir^ Original Sanskr, Texts. Vol. II- 2nd, Edit. 1871.

(q), Lassen^ Ind. Alterth, I. X25, 657 ; II. 181 ; Journ, of the Anatic Soc : of
Bengal. August 1833.

fr). Cf. Weh&i', Indische Streifen^ I. 233, where all the known sources relative to
this question are cited ; Lassen, loc. cit. in Vol, II. Sect. II. This genealogy appears
in the Mahdvastu and in Jdiakas III. 1, 8 and VIII. 1, 6.

(»). Weber, Ind, Studien, V, 426, makes the following remark on this subject :
** The name Ambatthardja refers to the (at that time perhaps lying more north-easterly)
Amhdsiai on the Tapti, on the other side of the Vindhyas ; or else to the
Arob^stani on the Indus ?.'* Cf. Lassen. Indien Alterth, 2, 173 ; Vishr^u-pur&i^a
{ed. Ball), 11.135 '' Amhashtha is the name of a military people and its country
mUiated in the middle of the Panjdb (probably the Amhdsiai of Ptolemy.")

U.2) Getiya or Cetaraffha to the north of Siviraftha (Jdtaka, zxi, i. 10). 8%vi
BUoh Of* I'Assen Zoc. eii., 1, 492.

L

tassa pntto Caro n^ma, Carassa putto Upacaro nama ahosi. Apaoaro'ti'pi
tass 'eva nama/^e, so Cetiyaratthe Sotlhivatinagare rajjam karesi.

Very curious legends are related about this Apacaro (Upacaro)
who reigned in the tenth generation after Mahdsammata.

He was the first of mortals who lied (the Yima of Iranian epic
poetry) ; for that, he fell into hell.

A certain Kapila was the high-priest (purohiia) of king Apacaro's
father, and his younger brother named Korakalamba had served Apacaro
himself as the attendant of his childhood. Apacaro promised him, that
as soon as he should ascend the throne, he would bestow on him the title
ot purohiia. But when the moment was come for fulfilling his promise
(i. e. when Kapifa resigned his duties and became a hermit), the title of
purohita or high-priest, was transferred by the king's order, to Kapila's
elder son. Afterwards, upon the entreaties of Korakalamba, Apacaro
oonsentod to withdraw that title from the sons of Kapiia, and, for attain-
ing his object, employed the following means : he lied (then, for the first
time falsehood appeared on the earth), and affirmed that Kapiia was the
younger brother of Korakalamba and the latter the elder brother ; that, in
consequence, it was to the last that the title of purohita or high priest
appertained. Having been given the lie by Kapiia, in person, the kin^
fell into hell.

The second part of that legend recounts the destiny of the five
sons of this king.

*^ The five sons of the king went to find Kapiia and told him :

" ' Be our refuge ' * Dear children ' replied the brahmati, ' your father

'' has transgressed the law; he has lied; he has ofi^endeda sage; and is
'* fallen into the hell Avici. The law is broken, alas ! you cannot live here
" longer.' — Afterwards turning himself towards the elder, * Dear
" child * said he, * come, go out by the east gate, march straight, on, thou
" wilt see a valuable elephant^ perfectly white, always holding itself firmly
*' erect; on the place which thou wilt recognise by this sign, raise a town :

P, XI. " it will become Hatthipura' (t), Next addressing the second son. he said P. xii.

" to him, • Dear child, take thy exit by the south gate, walk direct

(0. Perhaps Hastinapura, 60 miles to the uorth-east of Delhi. Respectiog
the foundation of this town, see La99en, I. 741 ; it is aUribated by the brahmans to
a King Hastin or Bhdraia,

[ =^i 1

'' forward, tkoa wilt see a valuable horse, entirely white, and on ibe spot
^ that this sign witt make known to thee, thou shalt bnild a town ; thou

" shalt dwell therein ; and it will become * Assapura \ After that

''addressing the third son, he said to him, * Dear child, depart by the west
" gate, mareh right on, thou wilt find a maned lion, and on the ptaee that
** this sign will indicate to thee, thou shalt raise a town and inhabit it ;

** it will become Sihapura Turning himself to the fourth son, he said to

** him, * Dear child, go out of the north gate, walk direct on, thou wilt
*' find a revolving cage, ornamented with precious stones, and on the spot
'^ thus indicated, found a town ; it will become Uttarapancdla ' (m). — -^
^ Finally addressing himself to the fifth son, he said, ' Dear ehild, thon
'' canst not live here ; in the city erect a lofty temple \ go, direct thy steps
** towards the north-west ; march straight ahead, thou wilt see two moun-
** tains, which, by striking themselves together, will produce the sound
'^ daddara ; on the place thus pointed out, thou shalt build a city and
•* therein dwell ; it will become the city of Dadapura ' '* (r). " These fire
''persanages departed, and,, conforming to those directions, built cities on
'' the sites indicated, and resided in them/'

Rafifi<>pafica putta agantva " amhakaiw avassayo hohlti." Vadiwsu
brahmano, *^ tata tumhakam pita dhamma;n nasetvd, musavddam katva^
isim akkositva, Aviei-patipanno dhammo nkm^ esa hato hanti, tumhehi
ca sakkd; idha vasitun'ti,'' vatva; sabbajettham,'* ehi tvam t^a pskiina*
dv&rena nrkkhamitva, ujuka;;} gaechanto, sabbaseta/n satatappatitthitam
hatthiratanam passrssasi, t&ya safli^aya, tattha nagaraw mapetva, Hatthipu-
ram ndma bhavrssatitt,^ &ha. Dutiya/;? amantetva, '^ tvam tdta dakkhinad-
varena nikkhamitva, ujukam eva (gacoha) gacehanto, sabbasetam assarata- P. xili.
nam passissasi, taya saQfi^ja, tattha nagaram mapetva, vasa, tam nagaram,
P. xn. Assapnram nama bhavissatiti", aha. Tatiyaw amantetvS, •* tvam tata pao-
ohimadvarena nikkjihamitva; ujukam gaeoha, gacehanto, kesarasiham
passissasi, taya safiflaya, tattha nagaram mapetva, vasa, tarn nagaram Siha-
puram nama bhavissatiti,'^ aha. Catuttham amantetv^, *' tvam tata uttarad-
T&rena nikkbamitva; ujukam yeva gacehanto, sabbaratanamayam cakkapafi«

(ii). About thiscitj, it is said, Jai. ziv. i, 15, that it is to be found in tbe
country of KampilUi, which perliapn is ideutical with Khanjila, Of. WiUotCa VUhi^u^
purdnfa {ed. Hall), II, 134 ; Cuuningham^ Ancient Geography of India^ I. 360.

(r). This towu cttll« to mind Darada \ it it upon the Upper Indus ; see Lasien
L 498, 139; Viih^u^purdt^, U. 185.

k

jaram passissasi, tdja 8afiuS>7a, tattha nagaram mapetv^, vasa,tam nagaram
Uttarapaucalan nama bhavi&satiti/' aha. Pancamam amantetva^ '* tata tay^
imasmim thane vasitum na sakka, imasmi^i nagare mahathupam katva, nik-
khamitva pacchima-uttaraja disaj^a, ujuka;;^ gaccha, gaoohanto, dve pabbato
auiiamanua;/} paharitva, daddara'ti saddam karonta^ passissasi, taya sanfiaya,
tattha nagaram mapetva, vasa, tam nagaram Daddapuram nama bhavis-
eatiti/' aha. To panca jana taya sanuaya gantva^ tasmim thane nagar&ni
m&petva, vasimsu.

In this legend, what is imp9rtant to us is less its relations with
the Iranian epic and the chief incidents common to both of them, than the
curious geographical indications which terminate the second half of the
extract. They show clearly that a part of the family of the Sakya kings
occupied the countries situated to the north-east of the Panjab, to wit :
Hastipura and Kampilla, The successor of Upacaro^ the king Mahddeva,
ruled over the city oiMUhila in Videha, i.e. in the northern-part of Bihar
which, at the present day, bears the name of Purania and Tirhdi.
This country is separated from Kosala by the river Gandak, and from
western Asaam by the river Karatoyd*

Afterwards, the legend goes on directly to Sujdid who reigned at
Sdketd (w). Ihis king had five sons by one wife, and a sixth, Jefa tor
JCeshpa) by another. At the instigation of the second wife, he chose the
last for his successor and expelled his other sons with their sisters. The
latter set out towards the north {Mahdvastu : Evam te kumara . . . •
. • . SaketSito mahanagarato niryatva uttaramukham pray^tal Kaglko^a-

leshu rajfia pragrihit&h ) and at first, all were received by the

king of Kdfikofala ; but> subsequently, the same king, fearing their popu- P. xi
larity, banished them towards the Himalayas, where the princes espoused
their sisters (a;), and built the city of Kapilavatthu, (y).

(to). Regarding this town, Cf» Cunningham, I. 405. The details which
follow here, are extracted from the Mahdvastu ; Cf. Ind. Studien, V. 415,
where the whole legend is related.

(x). Upon the marriages between near relatives among the Persians, see
Kern, cited by Muir, loc, dt. II. 457, 459. In Jdtaha xx. i, 4, we find the recital of the
dispute between the Sdkiyas and KoUyaa ; the latter cast reproaches after the former
'* tumhe KapUlavatthuke gahetva gacchatha ye 8onasig414dayo viya attano bhaginibi
saddhim vasimsn."

(y). Weher. Ind, fliudien. I. 172 ; Vishr^n pnrdi^a, II. 157.173 : *• Kdfi
fto^a^o, the country between Benaies and Oude ;'* CunnifigJiam,b20 1 **ib9 modem
Bdiar or Qondwamu"

[ Xlii t

Although these legends may have been transmitted to us by
later traditions, and consequently, may be enriched with fresh partioulars,
their subject is very ancient, and, here, as in the Brahmanio accounts {Qata^
pathahrdhmana)y we have a description of the aggressive movement of the
Aryans, at first, to the east, afterwards, to the north.

Perhaps this description comprises relics of the Aryan epic, but
it contains nothing about those Aryans amongst whom were originated^
castes, the yeda8> the Brahmanic worship, and the entire system of Brah*
manio life.

Already when they arrived upon the two tributaries of the Indus^
and later^ when they advanced towards the east, and to the south, the
Aryans encountered hostile settlers. They designate them in their songe
by different names : dasyu, cisunty and sometimes even apply to them the
term Arya or Aryans (z).

Ordinarily, the eommentators interpret the word dasyu^ as being
the name of hostile demons {a) : but some particulars in the description
of their exterior and also the signification, which is attributed to this
word, by the Brahmans^lead to the supposition, thht da sj/u commenced
to designate men, and particularly hostile tribes, not Aryan ; then, tribes
Aryan hy ori^n and iangua^&y but distinguished from those of the singers,
above all, by their religious opinions.

The later works (b) recognise the dasyus, as the deseendanta of P. xv.
Vifvamitraj one of the most celebrated singers of the Vedas.

The laws of Manu {c) divide the dasyus into two classes : those

who speak a barbarous language fmleechavacah and those who speak Aryan

^nr. (dryavacah). These tribes are pointed out in the north-east of India, in

QandhdrOj Cambcja^ etc., and,^ also in the east, in Magadha (Behar Proper).

In the eyes of orthodox Brahmans, they were ** excluded"
vMishkritdh ^ from the law*^ [dharmavdhydh) (rf.)

They are again ealled vrdtyds, and there was quite a peculiar

(«;. Cf. Muir, he, eit 361, quotation from Bigveda^

(a), Ihid. 364.

(l\ Aitareya, Br,, vii, 18:

(c). Muir. loc cit. 482.

I xiT J

ceremonial (vrdtyastoma) (^), for those of them who might have had the
desire to enter thB Brahmanio society. In th« description of this cere-
monial, amonor some intimations on the aspect and manners of these
tribes^ we find the following fact, that the tribes placed beyond tho law
speak a language of their own, different from that which was formed in
the Brahmanic centre. For themselves, the vrdty4s oonsidered an easy
language, as difficult (/*). They rolate respecting the asurds (like the
word da^yu^ the word asurd signified primarily, hostile man ; it was
afterwards applied to hostile demons), they relate, I say, that they irregu-
larly employed the word ahvnh in place of arayah (enemies) (^). Let not
the Brahman at all speak indistinctly ; such a language is that of the
amrds (A).

There is no doubt the language of the Vedas was once the
popular language ; but already, in these ancient times, shades of dialect
existed in it.

In the documents, of which we shall treat, we have but very
few data that permit us to form, for ourselves, a sufficiently clear idea
of the points in which these shades exactly consisted. In India^ the text
of the Vedas had its special destinies. Considered betimes as sacred and P. x
become an object of study, it was subject to an especial compilation and
reduced to greater uniformity, one whose natural effect was the extinction
of dialectic differences.

•

Under the influence of the study of this text, under the influence
of worship, in the cloistered centre of men who were, before all others, the
guardians of religion, perhaps too, in consequence of the emigration of a
P. XV. Bharata tribe among the foreign tribes («), this language which had, one
day, been that of the national songs, gave birth to a Sanskrit idiom, an
idiom artificial like every language belonging to a centre fixed and yet how-
ever not completely isolated from the influence of the language of other
classes of society, circumstances, which nevertheless did not exclude the
development of the language, about whose history therefore, it is possible to

(e), Tdn4ya Br., adh. xvii, and the ceremonial says, qyena^ Latyayana —
S., viii i see aJso Weber, ludische Literatv/rgesch:, 65, 75,
(f), Tdn4ya Br. xvii, i, 9.
ig). gdt. Br. iii, 2, 1 ; 23. 24
(A) . Ibid, Cf. Muir. loc. cit. p. 396.
(0< Tlii» is the opinion of Benfey. Qeschichie Spi'achwissenschaft, pp. 53 et seqq.

[ ^v 1

^rite. The Sanskrit, derived from the primitive Aryan language of India,
has therefore also its history ; its ideal life has been ti long time prolonged,
and in this sense, it may be said, that it still exists to this day.

The Aryans, on their arrival in India, did not all enter the Brah-
manio society, but lived by the side of this society, as the expression of
which may be regarded the castes, the Sanskrit language, all the Brahmanio
literature, and the philosophical systems of the different schools, which
nevertheless recognised, in its entirety, the organization of this Society.
It was constituted of tribes, equally Aryan, which the Brahmans them-
selves regarded as " placed outside the law," and which possessed as well
their own dialects as their own traditions*

It may be supposed this centre was the source of Buddhism, which
introduced into the society, new problems and developed, in many of the
manifestations of the spiritual life, new forms, of which one would vainly
seek the prototype in Brahmanio monuments. Just as Sanskrit is regarded
as the fruit of Brahmanio culture, so, one may fittingly see, in Pali, a P. xvii.
product of Buddhist society.

Beyond the few hints that we have about the language of the
aaurdSf s,nd the notices, no less brief and obscure, respecting the tribes of
the vrdtt/ds, we still possess the testimony of ydsia (ii. 2) (j), relatively to
the pristine existence of different dialects.

The enumeration of the faults, that it is necessary to avoid ia
reading the Vedas (/fc), presents a still more lively interest. The number
of these pretended faults, for example, the ommission of a consonant or a
semivowel when they are found placed one before the other, the interposi-
fiion of vowels or consonants, the disregarding of long and short vowels,
are nothing bufc pecularities, well known of the Prakrit dialects and of Pdii,

P. XVI. The first monument of this second branch of the Aryan speech (the

Prakrit) appears only remote enough and refers to a period subsequent to

0"). Upon the dialect of Camboja, see Weher, Indische, Streifen. Vol. u, p.
492. In Jdtaha xxi. i, 6 curious notices are found regarding this people.

Kitd patanga uragd ca bheka hatva kiinim sujjhati makkhikii ca I
Ete hi dhammd auariyariipa KanibojakdnaT/i vitatha bahunnan'ti ||
Cmnm. Ete kitadayo pdne hantva macco aujjhatiti etesanrpi Kamboja natth-
avasinam bahunnam anariyana7» dhamma te pana vitathd adhammd'va dhammd'ti
VttlU . . , Cf, Duncker. Oesch. der Arier. p. 536.

. . L/. uuncKer. uescn. aer Aner. p. Ddo.
(A;). Rigveda Prdiiadkhya (Max Mailer), p. ccbuLv.

^

t S7i ]

the establishment of Buddhism. These are the insoriptions of king PiyadoBi
or Asoka the Great. These inscriptions are engraved partly upon rocks,
partly upon pillars ; besides, there is one of them which is graven on a
stonCi discovered not far from Bhabra (I).

The inscriptions on rock are found in three places : the fint^ to
the west, in Guzerat, upon the mount of Qirnar {Oirinagara) ; the Second
in the village of Dhauli^ province Orissa ; and the third, in the village of
Kapurdi Oiri, to the north of the Cabul river, at the place where it receives
the Kdlapdni.

The inscriptions upon the pillars are found, firsts at Delhi ; the
second, at Allahabad ; the third, at Mattiah, upon the frontiers of Nepal ;
the foiir thy at Badhia, not far from there.

As those places were in the jurisdiction of Piyadasi, there were P. xviii.
at first a very great number of these " columns of the law." or ** pillars of
morality" (even) as the inoriptions term them. The contents of all these
inscriptions are identical. They are instructions to people united to the
profession of the king's creed.

The inscription of Bhabra differs more widely from the other
longer inscriptions both in contents and in certain details.

Piyadasi does not in them decree to himself the pompous title
'^ beloved of the gods," and, at the commencement, addressing himself to
the spiritual community of Magadha, employs a phrase analogous to that
which the Buddhist cannon has preserved to us.

1 . The King Piyadasi complements the community of Magadha,
and (lit. tells) wishes them few sufferings and an agreeable life, (aha ca
apab&dhatam ca phasuvihalatam ca).

In the Petavattuh, VI. i, 44 another king expresses himself after
the same manner :

Appabadham phasuvih^rafi ca pucchi
Yesaliyo Licchavi aham bhaddante 1

^. XVII. '* I Licchavi of Vesala, I say, * canst thou be happy' and I ask

thee ^ if thou hast few sufferings, and if lite to thee is easy'."

(I). See BurVs article in the Journal of the AeinUic Society of Bengcdy Vol. ix,
p. 616. '^ I found it on a hard grey granite block irregularly shaped and measuring
about two feet in two of its dimensions, and a foot aod a half in the third ; tho
weight of it is therefore incoobiderable.''

Then follows, in the inscription^ a disoourse oaloulated to rivet
a veritable Buddhist to it*

2. ^'Well-beloved !" said the king, "my reverence and good
feelings towards Buddha, towards the Law, and towards the Sungha (the
monkish community) are known."

3. '* All that our lord, the Buddha, has said, well-beloved !
is well spoken/'

But, even in the edicts^ wherein the Buddha, the priesthood, and
the Buddhist teaching are not expressly named ; the convictions of the
king, by no means, oppose the fundamental dogmas of Buddhism. Therein
are preached the same compassion for every living being, the same tolera-
tion for other religions, the same generosity that recommends the Buddhist
writings. The aim of the king is to instruct and strengthen his people,
in these ideas, and, for this object he appoints himself, and shows how he
has exalted himself to this kind of belief. He points out to his people,
the path which leads to happiness in this world and in the next (beyond P. xix,
the tomb), and the last action itself, the care of future happiness, does not
contradict the Buddhist dogma of Nibbdn, by the side of which there is to
be found, in the ancient monuments, the representation of another life of
happiness in heaven and of torments in hell.

I shall permit myself to insert here an unedited fragment
(Vimdnavatthu), which comes to confirm what 1 advance.

1 . ■ * When a man, long absent, returns from afar, safe and sound,
his parents, friends, and acquaintances give him a welcome on his arrival."

2. " So, the virtuous man's good works welcome him on his
arrival in this, from the terrestrial world, as a beloved parent who returns
from a voyage." (m).

3. '* Arise Eevati, great sinner, thou who, before the open
portals of immortality, hast not given alms ! There where groans resound,
where the infernal beings are plunged into torments, there we shall con-
duct thee also."

4. " Thus spoke the messengers of Yamay two great Yakshas
with flaming eyes : they seized Rmiti by her two hands and led her
towards the gods."

(w). Cy. these two verses with v«. 219 and 220 in the Dhammapada.

t xviii ]

P. XTiii. 5. These messengers brought her into the abode of the gods,

and made her halt not far from the place of Nandika : she saw the palace,
brilliant as the disc of the sun."

6. '^ (She saw the palace) the colour of the sun, magnificent, bril-
liant, luminous, clean, mantled with a net-work of gold. Whose is this
palace filled with people ? It sparkles as a ray of the sun."

7. " Troops of women, anointed with the juice of the Canddna
and ranged on each side^ enhance the beauty of the palace ; its splendour
rivalling that of the sun. Who enjoys h^piness in this palace, after
having attained heaven?''

Th^ messengers answer her : P. xx.

8. ** Vdrdnasi had a layman named Nandika, without envy,
charitable, and sage. That is his palace there, filled with people, and
brilliant as a ray of the sun.''

9. ^^ Troops of females anointed with the juice of the Candana
and placed on each side, enhance the beauty of the palace. Its splendour
rivals that of the sun. After having attained heaven, he tastes happiness
in this palace."

10. '* I am the wife of Nandika, his servant, I shall live in the
centre of delights in the palace of my spouse masters of every good ! I
do not wish to see hell."

11. ''Thou hast not done good in the world of the living, and
there, great sinner, is the hell for thee. The sinner, the envious one, is not
the companion of the inhabitants of heaven."

12. ^' What are these excreta ? What filthiness they produce !
what fetid odour they exhale!"

13. **It is the deep hell, that bears the name Savrasavaka, in
which men burn. Behold, Revati! thoushalt roast there one hundred
thousand years."

14. '' Have those who have fallen into that deep hell, wherein
mankind roast, sinned in body, words, or thought P"

15. ^* Thou hast lied to Samanas^ brahmans, and other flatterers :
that is wherein thou hast sinned."

16. *' Therefore »rt thou fallen into the deep hell SamsdvaJta,

wherein mankind boil. Behold, Revati ! there thou shalt roast during
one hundred thousand years."

^. XIX. 17. ** Hands and feet are out off (there) ; ears and noses too ;

flocks of Boreechowls and crows therein alight and devour the quivering
flesh."

18. ** Hence conduct me very quickly : I shall do much good ;
I shall distribute alms and practice religious austerity ; I shall become
modest and lowly ; I shall do all that insures happiness and whatever
needs no repentance hereafter."

19. '' Formerly thou wert negligent, now thou shalt groan ;
thou shalt taste the fruits of thine own acts."

20. " Who, therefore, come from the world of gods to that of men P. xxL
hath answered my question in this manner : * Give to the innocents, give

them vestments, a bed, nourishment, drink : the envious, the injurer, the
sinner, shall not be the companion oi the inhabitants of heaven P' "

"21. *' But, if now, departing hence, I am reborn among mankind,
1 shall be wise and well behaved; and I shall do much good :"

22. '' I shall distribute gifts ; I shall practice religious austerity ;
I shall become modest and lowly ; I shall plant gardens, and, in the mind
of faith, I shall trace pathways in the mountain-passes ; I shall deepen
wells and tanks."

23. '' The 14th day, the fifteenth, until the eighth day of the
first fifteen days of the month, the eve (o{ the following day) and the
next of these days, I shall observe the eight commandments without
departing from them."

24. ''I shall observe uposatha ; I shall be invariably moral, I
shall not cease to give alms : I have seen for myself."

25. Thus, plaintively, she spoke and her every sense in agitation
and they cast her into the terrible hell, head, down and feet up« She said :

26. '^ I was formerly envious ; I injured the Samarias and the
brahmans ; I lied to my husband ; that is why I am going into this dread-
fiUhell." (n).

(n). J have had for the Vimdnavatthu, two Mas, of the India Office Library^
8, in Singalese character ; B, in Burmese. P. stands for Paris Ms., C. for Childers.
(The l^eod of Revati has also heeo published in the ^* Ceyhn IHend,'* second series,
vols ii and iiL English Translator).

1. Cirappavasim purisam durato sotthim agatam I
Natimitta sugajja oa abhinandanti agataw ||

2. Tath'eva katapufina^it'pi asma loka paragatam I (1)
Punnani patigganhanti, piyam nativa (2) agatam ||

3. Utthehi Revate supapadbamme aparutadvare (3) adanasile ' (4)
Nessama tenn yattba tbananti (5) duggatd || samappita (6) nerajika

dukkbena ||

4. Ico'evam vatvaiia Yamasea data te dve yakkba lobitakkha brahanta I
Pacoekababasu gahetva Bevatim pakkamayimsu devaganassa san-

tika^n II

5. Evam tebi yakkhebi tavatimsabbavanam netva Nandikavimanassavi-'

dQre tbapita (7),
Taw Buriyamandalasadisam ativiyappabbassaram (8) disva ||

6. Adiccavannam ruoiram pabbassaram byambam (1) subbam kanoanaj

alaobannam /
Eass'etam akinnajanam vimana^ suriyassa rasmir (2) iva jotamanam |j

7. Narigana Candanasaralitta ubbato (S) vimanam upasobbayanti /
Tarn dissati Buriyasamanavannam ko modati saggapatto vimane'ti ||
te yakkbe puoobite'pi tassa

P. XXI. 8. Baranasiyam Nandiko namasi Upasako (4) amacobari danapati

vadannu I
Tass'etam (5) akinnajanam vimanam suriyassa rasmir (6) iva jotama-
nam II
9. Narigana Candanasaralitta ubbato vimanam upasobbayanti I

Tarn dissati Buriyasamanavannam so modati saggapatto vimane || 'ti
acikkbimsu.

( 1 ). S. param gataw.

( 2 ). B. ndtiwi ca.

( 3 ). S. apdrutamm dvdram.

( 4 ). S. siU.

( 5 ). R thuDanti.

( 6 ). S. samparitd.

( 7 ). Nandikassa vimanassa avidure yapita Kevati.

(8). B. pabhaydsaraw.

( 9 ). S. vyamhaw.

(10). • S. ramiir.

(11). S. ubhaso.

(12). S. updsiko.

(13). S. taw.

(14). S rawsir. P. suriyassa.

10. Nandikase&ham bhariya agarini fiabbakusalassa issar^ bhattu f

Yimane ramissami 'dan' aham na pattbaye nirayam dassanaya || P. zxiiL

11. £so te nirayo supapadhamme puil&aw taya akatam jivaloke I (1)

Na hi maooharidosako (2) papadhammo saggupagana;/) labhati eaba-
byatam ||

12. Kim nu gi^thaii ea muttaii ca asucim patidissati I

. Duggandham kim idam milha;/i (3) kirn etam upavllyati ||

13. Eea samsavako nama nirayo gambbfro (4) sataporiso I
Yattha passa satasahassani (5) tuvam pacoasi Revate ||

14. Kim na kayena vaoaya manasa dukkatam katam I
XXII. Eena sa;?2Savako laddho nirayo gambhiro sataporiso ||

1 5. Samane brahmane c4pi (6) afiile c4pi vanibbake I (7)
Musavadena vafioesi (8) tarn p^pam pakata*/^ taya ||

16. Tena samsavako laddho nirayo gambbfro sataporiso I
Tattha passa satasahassani tuvarn paocasi Revate ||

17. Hatthe 'pi ohindanti atho'pi pade (9) kanne 'pi obindanti atho 'pi nasam f
Atho 'pi k^kolagana samecca safigamma khadanti viphandam^nan'ti || ( 10)

18. Sadbu kho mam patinetba kahami kusalam bahum (

Danena samaoariyaya safinamena damena oa I P. zxiiv.

Yam katva sukhit^ honti na oa pacchanutappare ||

19. Pure tuvam pamajjitva idani paridevasi I
SayaAkatanam kammana??) vipakam anubhQyasi || (II)

20. Ko devalokato manussalokam gantvana puttho me evam vadeyya I (12)

. XXIII. Nikkhittadandesu dadaf ha dana;n acchadanam sayanam ath' annapanam I

(1). S. jitam'va loke.

(2). fcJ. rosako. P. maccbariyo ndsato.

(3). 8. milham. B. milam.

(4). B, gabbhlro. P. This word is also wanting lower down Of. the 14 and

16. vs.

(5). Yattha passa sahass^ni. S. sattavassasahassdni.

(6). S. v^pi.

Irandati

Vidhura, ., .. ^ „,

((7=:sabbavanibbakesu) ; Jdt, xxi. i, lO : vanibbakd=ydcakd, (C),

(8). S. vacesi.

(9). 8. pddam.

(10). P. vibandhamdnan'ti. B. vipphandhamdnan'ti.

(11). 8. anubhos&asiti. P, anabhossahi. B. auubhuyyasi,

(12), 8. vadeyyaw,

Kfl hi macchari roaako (1) papadhammo saggupaganam labbati salia-
byatam ||

21. Saham (2) nuna ito gaiit?a jonim laddhana manuBsiiM 1
YadaiiCLu silasampann^ k^h^mi kusala/?} bahum H

22. D&nena samaoarijaya samyamena damena oa I
Aramdni oa ropissar/i dagge saakamanaui (3) oa I
Kopafi (4) oa adapanafi oa vippasannena oetasa H

23. C&tuddasim pafioadasim yava pakkhassa atthamim 1
Fatibariyapakkhaii oa attbafigasusamagata?^/ 1|

24. XJposatham upavasissa^n sada silesu samvuta 1

Na oa dd^aena pamajjisaam (5) samam dittham idam maya 11

25. loo eva/n (6) vippalapanti^a pbandamaaam tato tato I

Khipimsu uiray^e gbore uddbampada-ayamsiran'ti || (7) puna sa (8) P. xxT,
P. xxiv. 26. Aham pure maoobari^i abosim paribbasika (9) samanabrabmananam I

Yitatbena oa s§*mikam vafioayitva gaoobam' abam niraye gborarupe'ti ||
Bevativim9.Qam dutiyaf^.

Tbis fragment sketobes us a oomplete pioture of tbe life beyond
tbe tomb. On the one band, a sinner raised to beaven by tbe servitors of
Yama, tbe god of deatb, oontemplates tbe felioity of ber virtuous spouse ;
on tbe otber, sbe sees tbe torments sbe bas prepared berself by ber sins.
Terrified, sbe implores a single favour, tbat of rebirtb in tbe world of men ;
and promises to atone for ber former faults, by a series of good actions.
She promises to be moral and bumble, and, besides, to plant gardens,
open out pathways across mountains, dig wells and reservoirs.

Tbey are precisely tbe same works tbat Asoka represents as bia
merits (10). He considers as sacred the same days (11), on which tbe
sinner RevatI promises to observe the rite of tbe general confession or
vpoaatha.

(1.) B. maocharidosako.

(2). 8. BO hi.

(3). S. duggasa^kamandni. P. duggahe sankamandni.

(4). S. papafi. t.

(5). S. paiuaddissam.

(C). S. iiue'va.

(7). S. uddkapddam. P. addhamp4dam.

(8). Idam samgitikdravacanam. (9). S. paribbdsikd.

(10). luscriptiou of Giruar, tablet ii.

(11). luscription of Deihi| southero portion, 11 and foil, lines.

i

[ XXlll 2

Thus Buddhism undoubtedly existed under the sovereignty of
Piyxidasi, and that king could soareely be any thing but a Buddhist

Kaae of his edicts, however, are contained in the Pali language.
The inscriptions, although similar in their contents, are written in different
dialects.

They furnish us with specimens : 1st, of the dialect of Western

»

India \ 2nd, of that of the North-east of India (the inscription of Kapur di
Giri) ; and 3rd, of that of Eastern India (the inscription of Orissa); 4th, P. xxvi-
with the fact that the inscriptions on the pillars «re everywhere written in
the same dialect.

All these dialects -are distinct from Pali especially in phonology.
In all four, we observe the absence of the reduplication of consonants^ resulting
from the assimilation of letters of different organs,

LXY. I. For example, we read in the Bhabra inscriptions ; Sadhamme,

Pali, Saddhammo, the good law; Siite, Ps.li, Sutta.

II. In the Qirnar inscription, we have pdcamtesu ^ Pali,
paccanta, remote ; ^tc.

Almost in each line we meet analogous examples.

III. In the short inscription of Bhabra, we observe the following
differences from Pdli : — this inscription is addressed to the SaJlgha of
Magadha, and, as Pdli is particularly/ designated under the name of the
Magadha language, these differences from them are so much the more
curious —

(1) the letter / replacing the letter r ; e. g, Idjdy, Pali rdjd,
Sanskrit rdjan^ a king ; dlii/a, Pali arii/a, Sanskrit drya, respectable ;

(2) the dropping of y in the words dvatake (from yd'oat)^ e
(Sanskrit yah, Pali yo);

(3) in the morphology, a remarkable thing, the nominative of
stems in a, of the masculine gender, has e for its termination.

lY. The dialect, which comes nearer to the last, is that of Dhauli
and the inscriptions on the pillars. Lassen compares it to the mdgadhi of
the Indian grammarians (1), and, in fact, they have many points common :
e. g. (1) the nominative singular in e, and / for r, The termination of the

(1). Loc cit II. 222.

tdt^^

[ xxiv ]

nominative singular is maintained even in compound words : e. g. (Db. vii)
hhdce-8udhi, purity of nature ;

(2) a becomes e^ in tbe dative singular ; e. g. hitasukhd^e, etdt/e,
athdys, ddkhindye, etc ;

(3) tbe locative singular of the same stems assumes tbe suffix si
for smimy in tbe declension of pronouns, by tbe dropping of m ; e. g.
dhammasiy silasi, athasi (on tbe Bbabra inscription we also find^ budhasif
dhammasi, samghasi) ;

(4) tbe dropping of y is equally observed tbere ; e. g. ddise
(Sanskrit, yddrig); e (S. i/ah) ; dia (S. ydvat); aaa (S. yasya); etm (S. yawt),

(5) In tbis dialect tbe dental nasal n corresponds to the palatal

n of Pali, e. g. ane (P. onne, S. anye) ; anndni (P. a^ndni, S. anydni); P, zxvii.
pamnadusam (P. pancadasam) \

(6) /, as in tbe Bhabra dialect, becomes r ;

(7) h, replaces tbe aspirates ; e. g. nigohdni (P. niggodha) ; h^ta^
puluve (P. bfMapuhba)]

(8) tbe soft consonants also replace tbe bard, e. g. dhammalibi
(P. dhammalipi).

V. Tbe Western dialects are distinguished from the Eastern, by
a more archaic phonology ; thus, (J) in tbe inscription of Kapur di Qiri,
we again find tbe three sibilants q, sA, s : priyadagisa, vashagatdni, priyasa ;

(2) tbe r is often maintained, e. g. savatra, mitrena, mitrasa,
gramanam ;

(3). tbe sibilants stand even before tbe dentals, e. g. ndsti, dham."
?. XXVI. mdnusasli {Girnar. viii.) ;

(4) in some cases, we observe the mutation of a sonant to sl surd;
e. g, paricajipta (Qmiar, oo, tynj and tvdj. (1)

From tbe particulars that we have cited, it clearly follows, that
Pali is distinguished from all the dialects of the inscriptions. It comes nearer
to the Eastern dialects^ although it often presents a degree of development
more ancient thaii the primitive Aryan tonguCyand this analogy is very deaerv'
ing of remarky for, it is necessary to obaerve a new iruUcation of the place where
we should seek the cradle of Pdli,

(1). Ihid. 489. ex, 1,

The word pdli sioriiifies ^^ text." It is written pdH or pdli, and is
prohnlly derived from the too\ pafh to read. Pali further bears the names,
(\) Magadba, (ii) language of Magad ha, i. e. eitherof the Magadha country
or of the singers (magadha, singer), and (iii) Jinatacanay the language of
the conqueror or Buddha. In short, this language is opposed to the vulgar
idiom : yaw lokiya ^^ pdrijdtan'ti " vadanti, tarn Magadha-bhasaya " paric-
thattakan' \i^' vuccati (1). " What in the vulgar idiom is named pdrijUta
(just so in Sanskrit), the Erythrina indica, assumes in Magadhi (i. e in
Pali.) the name pdricchattakay

Thus, Pali is not the popular language. It is the language of the textSy
the language of Buddha himself , and^ as this language is again called Magadhi, P. xxviii,
it mil follow, in the first place, that Buddha spoke Mdgadhi, in the second^
that Pdli and the Mdgadhi dialect ought fo be one and the same language.

But, we have seen, (i) that Pali is distinct from the dialect of the
Eastern inscriptions, and even from that of the Bhabra inscription, ad-
dressed directly to the monks of Magadha ; (ii) that it is also distinct from
the dialect of the inscriptions on the pillars and that of Dhauli, dialects chiefly
scattered over the East of India. It is therefore doubtful, whether Pali may
have been the language of Buddha, who, we know, was not a native of Maga-
dha, and did not exclusively labour there. It is true, (i) that his first
appearances are strictly connected with Magadha, (ii) that Buddhism at
:xv*ir. first wholly flourished therd, (iii) that it is thence that it was propagated on
all Mdes, and (iv) that it is there that king Asoka reigned ; but, on the
other band, we know that the teaching remained a long while oral, and
was transmitted orally to divers countries, not in any one dialect, but in
several simultaneously.

" The word of Buddha," says the canon itself (2), "is to be com-
prehended by each in his own dialect." Indeed, we have specimens of the
more ancient Buddhist writings in difi^erent dialects. Here are some
examples of them in verse.

Oodha^'dtakam, iv. 4, 3, in the Mahdvasiu, page 110-112.
Sanskrit, 2. (a). Name namantasya bhaje bhajantaf^ I

(6). krityanukaryasya kareyam arthaw (| (3).
(o). Asambhajantam na ca sambhajeya I
{d). Nalnarthakamasya kareya artham ||

(1). VimanavaMhu-aUha kathd, lit 10. 1. (i/«. of the JneUa Office Library)^
(2) PfdUmoksTia* p. zlii. (3)^ The M$, reads kriidnukdriyoiya.

[ xxvi 7

Pali, (a). Name namantassa bhaje bhajantam I

(b). Kiccanukubbassa kareyya kiccam ||

(c). Nanatthakamassa karejya attham I

id), Asambbajantam na sambhajeyya ||'

(2). '* (a) Salute him who himself salates ; (b) do good to him^
who himself does good : (e) render not services to him who claims them P.
unlawfully; the Sanskrit transcript c =1;he Pali d; {d} share not with
him who himself shares not "' (S. d = P. c).

Bamkrit. 3. (ci). Tyaje tyajantam satatam na gacchel

($). Apetabh^vena na samvai^eya ||,

(c). Dvijo drumam kshinaphalam viditval

{d). Any am pariksheya maham hi loko |J

Pali, (a). Caje cajantam vanatham na kayiral
(£)« Apetacittena na sambhajeyya ||
(c). Dijo dumam khinaphalan'ti fiatvdi 1
{d). Afiiiam samekkheyya maha hi loko ||
P. XXYIII. (3). "(a) Forsake him who forsakes, league not thyselE

with him, (Sanskrit, go not continually to find him); (b) do not associate*
thyself with a foot ; (c>ev©n a bird, when it perceives that a tree is without
fruit, (d) seeks another, for the world is wide.^

MahdvasiUy page 352, Dhammapadam, p. 19. (t. 2);

S. {a) Shasraw api vacanam P. flOOj (a) Sahasi^am api ce vac^
(6) Anarthapadasamhitanaml {b) Anatthapadasamhita I

(c) Ekaarthavati <?.reya, (c) Ekam atthapadaw seyyo,.

(d) Yam (jrutva upa(?amyati || {d) Yam sutva upasammati 1):

(100) (c) A single word containing sense is better (a) thaa
1^ thousand words (b) devoid of sense, (d) for, on hearing it, thou shalt
be tranquilised.

S. (a) Suhasramapi gathanam P. (101) (a) Sahassaw api ce gathil
(6) Anarthapadasamhitanam I {b) Anatthapadasamhita I

(c) Eka arthavati (1) (?reya, (c) Ekam gaihapadaw seyyo,

(rf) Yam <?rutva upa<?amyati || (d) Yaw sutvd upasammati ||

(101) (o) A single verse containing sense is better (a) than
a thousand verses {b) devoid of sense, id) for, on listening to it, thou
shalt be tranquilised.

(1). Ms, ekarthavati.

[ xxvii ]
8. (a) To ca varsha^atam jive P. (107) (a) Yo cavassasatawjantum P.

{b) Agniparicaram (l)caretl
(c) Fatr^aro chanDavasi
(rf) Karoti (2) yividbam tapaw (J
(e) Yo caikam bbavitatmanam
(/) MuhurtamapipQjayetl
(g) Sae^a pajana(3)(?reya,
{h) Na ca varsba^atam butam ||,

{b) Aggim paricare vane t

(c) Ekafi ca bbaivitatt^nam
{d) Mubuttam api pQjaye 1
(e) Sa eva pQjana seyyo,
(/) Yafi ce vassasatam butam ||

xxxix*. " (a) If om compares bim wbo lives a hundred years (b) and

attends to the fire " {Pdli^ " in the forest ")> (\^ Sanskrit^ simply, " who
eats in a wooden bowl, and^ living beneath a roof, practices austerities of
TarioBS kinds),, (c) and him, who, to a sage {dy renders homage even a
single moment, (e) that homage is preferable (0 to the offering of sacrifice
for a hundred years."^

8^ (a) Yat kincit tesham 'va bu- P. (108) (a) Yam kifici yitthaw va hu-

tam ca loke

{by Sarvam jayati pufiyapre*

ksbil

(c) Sarvam 'pi taw (4) na ca*
turbhagam eti

id} Abhivadanam ujjugatesa

^reyaw \[

tarn \^ loke
(6) Samvaccharaw yajetha
punnapekkho I

(c) Subbam 'pi taw na catu-

bbagam eti

(d) Abbiradana ujjugatesu

seyyo |J

(In Sanskrit : All whatever is brought on this earth in sacrifice^
is excelled by him who possesses the true faith), (a) Whatever the
sacrifice, whatever the offering, fbj that he who possesses the true faith
would bring for a whole year, fcj all that is not worth even tbe fourth
fdj of tbe homage towards him who is in the right path.

8, {a) Yo ca varsba^atam jive P. (110 (a) Yo ca vassasataw jive

(6) Dubi^ilo asamahitah 1 {b) Dussilo asamabito I

(c) Ekaham jivitaw ^reyaw (c) Ekabaw jivitaw seyyO|.

(rf) ^flavantasyadhyayatoll (5) (d) Silavantassa jhayino ft

(1). Ms. agnim paricaram*

(2). af«; karonti.

(3;. Ms, so eka pujand 9reyo»

(4). Ms, sarye cu

(5). M9*^ Y^yato^

[ xxviii ]

" (c) Better is a single day {d) of the man who is moral P. xxxi
and meditates, {a) than a hundred years that a man shall live (b) in im-
morality and without devoting himself to meditation."

8. (a) Yocavarsha<?atamjive P. (112) (a) Yo ca vassasatam jive

(b) Ku(?f do hinaviryavan I (b) Kusito hinavfriyo 1

(c) Ekaham jivitam ^veyRm (c) Ekaharn jivitam seyyo,

{d) Vfryam arambhato dridham (d) Viriyam arabhato dalham ||

?. XXX. ^* (c) Better is a single day of the life (dj of the energetic

man, fa) than a hundred years that a man shall live fbj in idleness and
effeminacy."

5. {a) YocavarshaQatam jive P. (115) (a) Yo ca vassasataw jivo

(b) Apa(?yam dharmam utta- (b) Apassam dhammam utta-

mam I mam I

(c) Ekahaw jivitaw <?reyam, (c) Ekaham jivitam seyyo,

(d) PaQyato dharmam uttamam || {d) Fassato dhammam utta^

mam ||
'* (c) Better is a single day of the life (d) of him who hath
contemplated the sublime law, (a) than a hundred years that a man shall
live (6) without contemplating the sublime law."
is. (a) Yo ca varsha^atam jive P. (113) (a) Yo ca vaasasatam jive

(6) Apa<?yam udayavyayam I (b) Apassam udayavyayft"*! I

{c) Ekaham jivitam (?reyam, (c) Ekaham jivitam seyyo,

{d) Pa(?yato udayavyayam || {d) Pasato udayavyayam ||

*' ((;) Better is a single day of the life (d) of him who has
comprehended the beginning and the end, (a) than a hundred years that a
man shall live (b) without comprehending the beginning and the end."

8, (a) Yocavarsha(?atamjive P, (114) {a) Yo ca vassasatam jive

(b) Apa(^yam amritam padam I (6) Apassam amatam padam I

(c) Ekahawt jivitam greyam, (c) Ekaham jivitam seyyo,

(d) Pa(^yato amritam padam || (d) Passato amatam padam ||

. " (c) Better is a single day of the life (d) of him who has '
comprehended immortality, (a) than a hundred years that a man shall live P.
{b) without comprehending immortality."

M: imstti.

M: vagga.

[ xxk ]

Mahdvastu and Mahdvagga,

a) Yadg, ime pradurbhavanti dfaarmS.

h) Atapino dhyajato brahmanasya /

c) Athasya kankshi vyapanenti sarvSi

d) Yada prajanati sahetudharma^r* ||

a) Yad4 ha ve patubhavanti dbamm^
h) Atapino jhdjato brahmanassa I

c) ^th'assa kafikhd vapayanti sabbs.

d) Yato pajanati sahetudhammaT/v ||

'^ (a) When the laws appear clear (b) to the brahman who prac-
tises asceticism and meditates^ (c) all his passions disappear, (d) for, he has
acquired the knowledge of the law and its principles."

M : vastu. (a) YadA ime pradurbhavanti dharma

(6) Atapino dhyayato brahmanasya /
(c) Athasya kafikshd vyapanenti sarva
{d) Yada (1) kshayam pratyayanam (2) avaiti \

M : vagga, {a) Yada ha ve patubhavanti dhamm^

(b) Aiapino jhayato brahmanassa I

(c) Ath' assa kafikbd vapayanti sabba
{d) Yato khayam paccayanaw avedi |j

'* (a) When the laws appear clear ("b) to the brahman who prac-
tises asceticism and meditates, (^cj all his passions disappear, (d) for, he has
acquired the knowledge of the annihilation of causes."

M : vBLStu. (a) Yada ime pradurbhavanti dharma

(b) Atapino dhyayato brahmanasya I
(o) Yidharshicd tishthati marasainya

(d) Sciryenaiva obhasitd antarikshaf/} j| (3)

M : vagga* (a) Yada ha ve patubhavanti dhamma

(b) Atapino jhayato brahmanassa I

(c) Yidhupayam titthati marasenati

(d) SQriyo 'va obhasayaw antalikkham ||

(1). This word is wanting in the Ms,
(2). I thus correct the reading pt'aiydna

(3). The F41i Ms. of Paris only reads : obbdsitam. antariksham, it may bo
obhisitam antariksham*

il&ka^.

" (a) When the laws appear clear, (J) to the brahman who prao*
tices asceticism and medidaies, (c) he remains conqneror of Mara's army
(d) as the sun that illumines the sky."

M: vasiu. (a) To brahmano y^hitapapadharmo P. xxxiii.

(b) NihuhQko nishkashayo yadatma I

(c) Kshina^ravo antimadehadhari

{/i) Dharmena so brahmano brahmavadam vadeya fl

M: vagga, (a) Yo brahmano bahitapapadhammo

(6) NihuhuAko nikkasavo yatatto I
(c) Vedantagti vusitabrahmacariyo
{d) Dhammena so brahmano brahmavadaw vadeyya I
(e) Yass* ussado n'atthi kuhinci loke ||

'* (a) The one who annihilates the sins in himself, (6) who is not

proud, who is passionless, whose spirit is humble (in Sanskrit, whose spirit

is passionless), (c) who has comprehended the Vedas and is chaste, (e) for

?. XXXII. whom no joy exists in the world, (d) that one is lawfully called a brahman,"

M : vaslu, (a) Parvavase nivasena

(6) Pratyutpanne hitena va I

(c) Evam sawjayate premnam

(d) Utpalam y& yathodake ||

jK" : vagga. (a) Pubbe Va sannivasena

(6) Paccuppannahitenava I

(c) Evam tarn jdyate pema^n

(d) Uppalam 'va yathodake || (1)

*^ (a) By sojourn in the first existence (6) or good conduct in the
present life, (c) love is born (d) as the lotus in the water."

The first investigators of Buddhism already knew that the sacred
books of the Buddhists existed in many languages, and ^t/rnot^ has conse-
crated the last pages of his commentary on the ^* Lotm of the Good Law "
to tbe examination of some passages of the Buddhist canon, preserved in
different languages.

Before him, Hodgson (2) to whom we are indebted for the dis-
covery of the Nepalese originals of Buddhist writings, had expressed his

(1). ildfidvaaiu and Jdt ii. 9, 7.

(2). Joum, of the A$, S^c, of Bengal Vol. tL pp. 682 et seqq.

f XXXI )

©pinion on this point. Here we recapitulate what his views are upon the
diversity of the compilations.

It is necessary to distinguish the propaganda and the extension of
tiie religion from the elaboration of the speculative principles whence the
religious system has entirely sprung. In the first case the majority is
addressed ; in the second, on the contrary, the minority. This is why the P. xxxiVi
Buddhists, as practical reformers, addressed themselves to the people and
made use of a popular idiom for the propaganda.

The dogmatic philosophers, however, who laid down the bases of
the popular faith, expressed, defended, and systematised them in Sanskrit.
ffodgson points out (1), that Sanskrit was indispensable to them for the
defence of #heir philosophic principles. The Buddhists, in his opinion, were
generally scholars, and had to deal with scholars in their discussions.
'. xxxill. Consequently, the Buddhists, so far as they were philosophers, exclusively
appropriated Sanskrit (2). But, by their side, they had a practical system
of religion, which diffused itself through the medium of the popular idiom.

We ought, therefore, according to him, to consider the Pali com-
pilation as a secondary source, since the Ptojndpdramitd^ a fundamental
treatise on Buddhistical philosophy, has not been found in Pali. (3)

Relatively to the question that engages us, all authors who have
followed Hodgson, have almost substantially maintained the same opinion*
Thus Lassen (4) estimating the list of the different languages in the
several kinds of writings preserved through Tibetan sources (5), makes
the observation, that here is discovered the marked influence of this syste-
matisation of the grammarians, which, in the dramas, has caused to bo
assigned to each character, a dialect suitable to his condition.

This fact makes him think, that, probably from the beginning,
the sacred writings of the Buddhists were comprised in many languages.
He believes, that Buddha made use of different dialects for preaching ; the

Sanskrit) when he spoke to the brahmans ; the common idiom, when ho

» ■— ■ ' ' ... I ■ -. ^

(1). Journ of the As. Soc, of Bengal Vol vi. p. 683»

(2). ''Tho philosophic founders of Buddhism used Sanskrit, and Sanskrit
only to expound, defend, and record the speculative principles of their system.*'

(3). JfciUp. 684.

(4). Loc, cit. ii. p. 491.

(5). Journ of the As, Soc of Bengal^ Vol. vl p. 688, oommanication of
Kioma d0 KQriis.

[ xxxii ]

addressed the people ; that for the narratives of his life^ and for his di8«
courses, there were also two redactions, the Sanskrit compilation and the
popular one. These two redactions would have already existed from the P, xxxv,
time of the first council ; a fact that would explain how popular ferms
crept into the Sanskrit redaction (l),but, into the sutras (P. suttas), which
are known not to have been published till later, popular forms were intro-
duced^ because, they were written in a country in which Sanskrit was badly
known^ that is to say^ in Cashmir. (2)

P. XXXIV. (3). Bumoufj also admitting two redactions, viz : the Sanskrit

and the Pali ; says, that one of them was designed for the people, the other
for the brahmans ; but,^ in what relates to the Pali redaction, he discovers it
has undergone the influence of grammar more recen^tly (4).

V* Alicia (5) considers the Pali redaction as orthodox. The
Nepalese compositions have, according to him, been the work of heresies,
regarding which the chronicles of Ceylon, and, in particular, the D^vamso
speak.

Childers (6) regards them equally as later versions of Pali.

All these authors have noticed only two redactions, the Sanskrit
and the P§.li. Yet it is notorious that there was a much greater number of
Buddhistic canons, and that they were not only written in Sanskrit and
Pali, but also in other dialects (7).

The recognised literary monuments of Pali all belong to an epoch
subsequent to the creation of Buddhism, and are of two kinds: (a) the
canonical scriptures (we here naturally speak of the compilation and not of
its contents, which, e.g. in the jdtakasy can show a high antiquity) i. e. the
Three Pitakas or the Three Baskets, divided into Sdiraa (P. suttas) or Dis-
courses, Vmaya (P. vinaya) or Buddhistic Discipline, and Abhidharma
(P. abhidhamma) or Buddhist Philosophy ; (6) the non-canonieal writings :
religious works, chronicles, grammars, metrics, dictionaries, treatises on P.

medicine, etc.

- — ^ — ■

(1). Lassen, he. dt ii. 493.

(2). Hid, p. 492.

(3). Loins de la honne hi, p. 862.

(4). The culture of P^li in Ceylon has introdneed into it a fictitious regularity.

(5). Introduction to Kaccdyana'a Grammar p. 69.

(6). Childers. Notes on Dhammapada^ in the Journal of thf fiot/oJ Am, Boo*

for May 1871, p. 9. '

(7). Wassilief, Buddhism, I. 267.

[ xzxiii ]

He writings of the first kind are, moroorer, more aaoient than all
specimens known to this day of those of the second kind.

Thns then Pali appears to ns at the same time as Buddhism.
The first written monument in this language is Buddhistical.

The Buddhists regarded the three Pitakas as the language of their
master, and respecting its history, they have preserved to us, canons of
short, but valuable teachings,
P. XXXV. The better to estimate their respective values, it is needful to

examiae the elements that made up the religious community {Sahgha) —
the guardian of the law, in an eminent degree.

The canon itself, notably the division of disciplinary regulations
{^maya)j furnishes some indications about the organisation of the primitive
community. These data are chiefly collected in the chapter of tlje Vinaya
which treats of the rite of " consecration '' {Mahdvagga : mahakhandhako
pathamo) (1). H^ere we find a long list of persons whom it is absolutely
necessary to exclude from admission into the religious community or
whom it is permitted to admit only under fixed conditions.

The rules, respecting persons eligible or otherwise for admission
among the monks, have evidently not been framed altogether, but were
developed and collected gradually. The mere mention of certain indivi-
duals is a sufficientproof that the fact of their admission into the community
preceded the rule, and that the rule was not laid down preventively, but
developed under the infiuence of determined circumstances.

Here are the regulations which relate to admission into the
religious community.

1st. Persons guilty of some grave crime, e.g, parricide, etc ; 2nd
persons afilicted with some infirmity were rejected.

Excluding these two classes, 1st the Urthikas, i. e. those who P. xxxvii
belonged to a non-buddhistic sect, were admissible, provided they submitted
to a preparation of four months.

*' Whoever, brethem ! after having formerly been a heretic
(tirthika) desires to be consecrated in this law (the Buddhistic) he is to
have four months for his preparation."

(1). Our citations refer to the At** of the National Library at Pam, QrimbM$
ooUectious, No. 6,

[ xxxiv 3

Yo 80 bhikkhave aimatittliiyapabbo imasmim dhamihayiaaye
ftkai^khati pabbajjam upasa^tpadam tassa cattaro mase parivaso databbo.

2nd. (a) The priests of Agniy Aggikds, (6) the Jdfilds Were
admitted mthout this Gondition^ because they do not deny rites and
good works.

?. XXXVI. Ye te bhikkhaTe aggika fatilaka te agata npasampadetabba. Na

tesam parivaso databbo. Ta^/} kissa hetu^ kammavadino ete bhikkhave

kiriyavadino.

Commentary. Aggika 'ti, aggiparioaranaka ; jatilaka, 'ti, tapa8&
ete bhikkhave kiriyavadino'ti, ete kiriyaw na patibahanti^ atthi kammatn,
atthi kammayip^ko 'ti, evam ditthaka.

" O brethren ! if the attendante of the god Aggi^ or the Jdtilaids^
present themselves, they ought to be consecrated yrithout a delay being
imposed on them for their preparation. Why ? Because, O brethren I
their doctrine recognises deeds (and their consequences) and rites."

The commentator interpreting this passage, says : '* The Aggik^s
are attendants of the god Aggi, the Jatilakas are ascetics," and further,
^^ they do not deny rites, and are convinced that there are deeds and their
consequences."

(c). All those who belong to the race of the Sakyas, because
they cannot defame the law of their parent :

Sa ce bhikkhave jatiya Sakiyo afifiatitthiyapubbo agacchatii so
agato upasampadetabbo, na tassa parivaso databbo.

Commentary. Te hi titthayatane pabbajita 'pi sasanassa avan«
nak^md., na honti amh&kam fiatisetthassa sasanan'ti vannavadino 'vahonti,

" brethren I if any one of the race of the Sakyas, after, at
first, having been a heretic, presents himself, he ought to be consecrated on
his arrival and a delay should not be imposed on him for his preparation.'^

The commentator thus interprets this passage :

^* Although these (Sakyas) have been consecrated in a temple of
TMJiikas, they will not set themselves to defame the law, but will sound its
praise by saying ' It is the teaching of our better parent.' " P.

3rd. They could not consecrate the king's attendants nor those
who received the treatment of servants :

[ x?xv. }

'Na bhikkhaye rsjabhato pabbajetabbp :

" O brethren 1 do not consecrate the king's servants. •'•—We here
speak of a case in which the attendant has not received the royal order to
become a monk.

They conld not consecrate a brigand who exercised his calling
overtly : • '

Na bhikkhave dhajabaddho coro pabbajetabbo :

^' brethren I it is unseemly to consecrate a brigand with
a banner."

The commentator thus interprets these words :

xxxwr, Dhajaw bandhitva vicar atiti dhajabaddho mQladevadayo viya loke

pakato 'ti vuttaw hoti yo pana rajaputto rajjam panetantci

gamaghatadini karotiti, so pabbajetabbo rajano hi tasmiw pabbajite tns-
santi, sa ce pana na tussanti na pabbdjetabbo. Pnbbe mahajane pakatq
corO; paccha corakammam pah3,ya, paficasllani samSrdiyati^ sa ce manussa
evaw jananti, pabbajetabbo.

"He is called a brigand with a banner who marches about with
his standard hoisted, since he is also known in the world, as, for instance, is

the lawful king" *^ But, if some king's son, founding a

kingdom, destroys villages and commits similar acts, it is befitting to con^
gecrate him, for kings will be satisfied with him ; if, however, kings are dis-
satisfied with him, it will be unseemly to consecrate him. If a brigand
known as such among the people, in course of time ceases his brigandage
and to the knowledge of every one embraces the five precepts, it is proper
to consecrate him."

They could not consecrate a slave :

Na bhikkhave daso pabbajetabbo :

'* O brethren ! it is not right to consecrate a slave."

l!iiis rule however admitted of numerous exceptions. They con-
sidered prisoners of war (iaramardn{td)y as slaves, and, could, in certain
esiAen, consecrate them.

'* If a slave, a prisoner of war, is brought by any one and lives with
him, whether in prison or guarded by the inhabitants, it is improper to
consecrate him ; but, if he escape, he might be consecrated in the place

whereat he shall arrive; or if the king is pleased to say ^^ enlarge the
capiires " • • • • ihej may be consecrated when set at liberty.

(Commentary : ^^^EvamrQpo karamaranito daso yehi anito tesam P. xs
santike v^ vasanto va bandhanaor^re baddho va purisehi rakkhiyamilno y&
na pabbajetabbo ; rauua, tutthena karamaranitake mnucatha'ti, valvft
t • • • bandhanamckkhe kate, pabbajetabbo . . . • )

'^ If the king have children by a female slave, like the sons of a
minister, they cannot be consecrated."

Rafifio vannadasinam putta honti, amaccapnttasadisa te 'pi na
pabb&jetabba.

^' If any poor people whatever, giving out ^' we are living at the
expense of the community/' shall present themselves and become servants
of a monastery, they can be consecrated."

Te duggatamanussa saAgham nissaya jivissamaHi, vihare kappi-
yakaraka honti, ete pabbajotu;n vattati.

He who was born of a slave mother and a free father could not
be consecrated.

F. XXXVIII. Yassa matapitaro dasa mata. eva das! pita adaso, tam pabbajetnm

na vattati.

If a slave had no master^ he was considered enfranchised and
could bo consecrated. If it happened that a slave had been consecrated
without being known and that it afterwards became known, it was necessary
to enfranchise him.

Kissamikadaso hoti, so bhuiljissoVa kato pabbajetabbo, ajananto
pabbujetva, upasampadotva va pacchajanati, bhufijissam katum eva vattati.

It is therefore quite evident that the primitive religious comma-
nity was of a very mixed description, A slave, a heretic, a brahman, a
priest of Agni, a captive, etc, could become monks. All these persons
could express themselves in different languages, and, in fact, we find in the
Vinai/a the following direction : after the ceremony of admission, the ten
Buddhist commandments are to be explained to the new convert, if he did
not understand them in the language of the sacred writings ; it was per-
mitted to explain them to him, and comment on them in any other dialect
that was intelligible to him (1).

(1). Seo Pt^tiuiokfiha p. xuv.

[ xxxvii ]

And we can positively affirm, that this instance of the ignorance
of the language of the sacred writings used to present itself frequently.
The difference of languages is clearly indicated in the earliest periods of
Buddhism.

During the interval that elapsed between the first and second
councils, or between the first and third, according to the information fur- P. xU
nished by those among the Buddhists who did not know king Kdldsoka
and were not aware of the council that was held during his reign, in the
second and third centuries after Buddha's death, several sects were formed
among the Buddhists.

The master had himself predicted the advent of these mutilators
of his doctrine : (gdsanadushaMh) ; he said :

" In the third century after my nihhdn^ such people will be
respected.'*

Karandavydha, page 81. Bhagavan a^ha : tritiye varsha^ate gate,
mama parinirvritasya tathagatasya idri^a dakshiniya bhavishyanti.

These sects differed about the interpretation of one of the epithets,
arhaty saint^perhaps too, the primitive name of the Master. They tolerated ^
corruptions of the original character of the disciplinary institutions. They
taught many things by communicating from pseudo-commentaries expres-
Bions of that oral literature which was preserved in the religious commu-
nities and which was only written at a latter period. These pseudo-com-
mentaries were naturally attributable, partly, to the fact that the monks
•poke different dialects.

It is said in the Tdrandtha (1) those who transmitted the siiiraa
(P. snttas), in the dialects of different countries, modified to some extent,
the arrangement and connection of the expressions embodied in them,
whence there resulted certain differences in the long and short vowels,
which might have the effect of altering the meaning.

For persons who did not completely understand any other
language except their own vernacular, it was a very easy matter to con- '
found one letter with another, and, in consequence of euch a substitution, to
teach things which did not proceed directly from the original text of the
canon.

(1). Page 42 i Cf. Di^avamsot in D'Alwis Ftti Grammar p. 63^ and Prdtr
mokiha, p. xi.li.

{ XXXViIi ]

Thus w^ know there was a sect called Vttardpadhaha which upheld
that the first degree of sanctity was attainable from one's birth. As to
believing the commentator of the work in which this point was taaght,
that would depend on this, whether in the phrase upahacca parinibbdyi^
**he reached repose after having completed (his terrestrial life)'* there P.' zIL
should be substituted for the word " upahacca^^ having terminated, (har
+ suffix tya), the word ^'upapajja " (pad + suffix ya), being manifested.

Yesam va upahacca parinibbayiti padam parivattetva upapajja
parinibbay iti ca pariyapunantanam saha uppattiya araha hotiti laddhi fiey*
yathapi etarahi uttarapadhakanam (1).

Two other sects, the Puhbaseliyd and Sammitiyd admitted, that
there existed an intermediate state, i. e., one in which a being, who is
endowed neither with divine sight nor supernatural faculties, has yet the
power of attaining it during seven days and the moment most favourable
is (at conception) from the ^carnal) union between his father and mother*
And this opinion arises from the fact, that certain words were misunder-
stood in the phrase; — antaraparinibbayiti, "Meanwhile he reached
repose "; — the sense of a noun was given to an adverb :

Antaraparinibbayiti, suttapadam ayoniso gahetvS antar^bhavo

nama atthi, yattha pattho dibbacakkhuko viya, adibbacakkhuko iddhimft

viya, aniddhima matapitusamagaman ca {Ms. reads tapiti) eva utusamayaH

P. XL. ca olokayamano sattaham va atirekasattahaw va titthatfti laddhi seyyathapi

pubbaseliyanafi c'eva sammltiyanafl ca.

In the appellations of different schools the names of localities are
discovered, for example :

(1). Vajjiputtdy the sons of the country of Vajji (S. vriji ; vatsa^
in Pali vaccha ; it is therefore doubtful whether this name is identical with
the Sanskrit Vatdputra)*

(2). Cetiyd^iYk^ locality bears the same name ,
(3). Aparaseiiyd (S. Apara<?aila).

(4). Puhbaseliyd ; — the two last probably drew their appelationi
from the mountains near which the communities lived;

(5). Shannayarikd, sect of six towns ;

(1). Kathdvathu (Ms. of the National Library of PariSf page nl, on the
back). In the MahdvyutpaUi^ on p. 49, on the back, we find mentioned, among the
different lists of monks, the UpapadyaparinirvdyU

[ xxxix ]

(G). Four seols bore the name of AndhaM, taken from the name
^f the country oall^ Andhra : they were the Fubbaseliyd, Aparaaeliyd Raja'
^giriydj and isiddhatthikd ;

Andhaka nima Pubbaseliyd, Aparaseliyd, Eajagiriya, Siddhat-
ihika 'ti ime paccha-uppannanikaya Kathdvatthuppakarana-^tthakaiha,-^ j

(7). The school of Lokottaravddin is called Madhyadegikay in the P. xlii.
MahdvastUj at the beginning ^

(8). The name of the school UUarapadhakd is probably, con-
nected with the word uitardpatha, 'northern route,^ '^ northern country/

The -communities in spreading themseWes over the whole of tha
peninsula, carried with them an oral literature. Thus, in the Prajndpdra"
mitd (page 120, Ms. of the British Museum^ Oriental section 87) it is said,
that, at the death of the Master, the silitras (suttas) containing the explana-
tion of the pdramita, will, at first, be spread ovor the Deocan, whence they
will pass into Eastern India, and thence to the north :

Ime khalu punah Qariputra shatparamitapratisawyuktah sQtr^ntSs
tathagatasyatyayena dakshinapathe pracarishyanti dakshinapathat punar
eva ^artanyam pracarishyanti. Vartanyah punar uttarapathe pracarish-
jantL

In transporting themselves from oountry to country, the monks
were naturally forced to adopt the language of the country in which they
preached, and, as the entire literature remained a long while oral and was
preserved only in the memory, translation could not present difficulties.

This is the point of departure of the various canons (1) to which
a legend of the P aliVinay a before alluded (2). It relates of Buddha,
that it was proposed to him to translate his sermons into the language of
the Vedas, because his hearers from different countries mutilated his
language ; but he rejected the proposal and declared : that the word of
P- xu. Buddha should be comprehended by each in his own dialect,* (see p. xxv).

It is difficult not to conclude from all this, that, primitively, there
was but a single canon and only two redactions, the one Sanskrit and the
other in the popular idiom, but, that the primitive literature was written
differently according to the language of each country ; and it is this that

(1). Wassilief ; Buddhism, i. p. 267.
(2). rrdtimoksha, p. xlii, n-9i.

[ xl J

ezplainB the resemblance which certain passages of some canons exhibit by

the side of the general \vant of conformity to the division and title of the P. zlii

parts.

Probably the Pali Tripitaka (P, Tipitaka) is to be considered as
one of the local canons. The language of this canon thus bears, as has
been seen above, the name of MdgadhL

Does this term proceed from the word that signifies singer or from
the name of the country?

This is a question that is easy to deoide.

As the first Buddhist monks may have had the custom of singing
the " word of Buddha/' — this is what the terms gdthd, geyd^ applied to a
certain kind of Buddhist works bear witness to — it is likewise remarked in
the Prdtimoksha (P. Pdtimokkha) (1) that they abused this custom. It is
not every kind of singing that is permitted to be employed for the Vinaya^
pitaka. But, notwithstanding what has been said above, the following
facts will appear to us much more decisive for the explaiZiation of the
term in question.

The beginnings of Buddhism are connected with Magadha.
According to tradition, it is there that Sakyamuni taught. It is thence
that the first preachers set out, thence that the sacred writings were trans-
ported to Ceylon. Subsequently, it is again in Magadha, that Buddha--
ghosUf the most important commentator of the Pali canon was born.

There is no reason to doubt, that they may have written in Pali
in India itself. There is therefore no authority to reject absolutely the
tradition which attributes to Pali the name of the language of Magadha.
But Pali, as we have seen, is distinct from the dialect of the Bhabra in«
ficription and doubtless also from that of Magadha ; it differs too from the
Mdgadhi of the dramas and from that of the Jainas. The two last ciroum-
etanoes are explained by another appellation given to Pali by the Bud-
dhists. They say that Pali is '* the language of Buddha and not a secular
language." The origin of this designation is distinctly allied to the des-
tinies of the local dialect of Magadha in the bosom oi the Sa&gha or
monkish community.

"S, XLii. It is from these conditions, in which Pali was developed in the

midst of the SaAgha, that this fact is understood, viz., that Pali grammar

(1), P. xuv, n-96.

[ ^H 1

presents, forms more ancient than those of the dialect of the Eastern in-*
Boriptions, the dialect which comes nearest to Pali, and that the differences
which distinguish it from the dialects of Magadha are at the same time
explicable.

In coarse of time, while the doctrine was developing, an oral
literature sprung up among the Buddhists ; but they were unwilling to
distinguish the new from the ancient and designated both by the term,
^* word of Buddha." Yet^ that the truth might not be easily discovered,
that the new might seem old, it was altogether necessary, that, externally,
the one should not differ from the other in anything ; and the primitive
oral literature, most certainly, exercised an influence upon latter works.

Many circumstances favoured this infiuence. The monkish com-
munity was not composed exclusively of matured men. Novices were also
admitted and could even be consecrated from the age of four years.

" I give permission, monks V says Buddha in the Mahdvagga,
*' to consecrate a child of four years, if it is in the condition of chasing
crows."

Anujanami bhikkhave Onapaficavassam d^rakam kdkucchepaka;n
pabbsjetun' ti.

New members could be born in the community itself For this
purpose the following legend is related :

'' At that time, a certain pregnant woman was consecrated a nun.
Her pregnancy did not manifest itself till after her consecration. She set
herself athinking, " what shall I do with this child f '' The case was
submitted to Buddha, and he said, " I give permission, monks ! to rear
this infant for this station, until it attains the age of reason," i. e. accord-
ing to the commentary : '' as long as he shall be unable to eat and bathe
by himself."

BhiJkkhunivibhanga : Tena kho pana samayena afiflatard itthi

sannisinnagabbha bhikkhunfsu gabbajita hoti. Tassa pabbajitaya gabbho
vutthasi. Atha kho tassa bhikkhuniya etad ahosi kathan nu kho maya
imasmiw darake patipajjittabban' ti, Bhagavato etam attham arocesum :
** Anujanami bhikkhave posetuw ySva so darako vinnutaw papunatiti."

Commentary : Yava khaditum bhufijitum nahayituii ca attano
dhammataya sakkotiti atthp.

C » 3

III. PALI GRAMMAR.

99

99

Chapters. Sections. Pages*

I to VI PHONOLOGY 1 to 70 1 to 20

I Alphabet ••• ••• ••• 1 to 6 1 to 4

II Comparative Phonology ••• 7 to 46 4 to 14
Yowels ••• ••• ••• 8 to 15 4 to 6

Diphthongs ... ••• ... 16 to 20 6 & 7

Consonants ... ••• ... 21 to 46 7 to 14

III to VI Sandhi ... ... ... 47 to 70 14 to 20

III The Meeting of Vowels ... ... 47 to 52 14 to 16

,, The Transformation of Vowels into

Semi yowels ... ... ... 53 to 56 16 & 17

\] The Insertion of Consonants between

Vowels ... ... ... 57 17 & 18

IV The Meeting of NiggaMta with other

letters ... ... ... 58 to 64 18 to 19

V The Meeting of Vowels and Consonants. 65 to 67 19

VI The Meeting of Consonants... ... 68 to 70 20

VII to XIII MORPHOLOGY 71 to 249 20 to 93

VII Declension ... ... ... 71 to 148 20 to 51

y, i. Declension of Stems t^zYA a roire! ... 73 to 103 21 to 33

yy 1. Stems masculine in a ... ... 73 to 80 21 to S3

,y 2. Stems masculine m d ... ... 81 23

^y 3. Stems feminine in ci ... ... 82 to 84 23 & 24

yy 4. Stems masculine in t ... ... 85 & 86 24 & 25

,, 5. Stems masculine in / ... ... 87 25 k 26

,y 6. Stems feminine in i, { ••• ... 88 to 90 26 <& 27

,, 7. Stems neuter in f, ^ ... ... 91 27

,y 8. Declension of sakhi ... ... 92 28

,, 9. Stems masculine in u, ti ... 93 & 94 28 A 29

„ 10. Stems feminine in n, ti ... 95 & 96 29 & 30

,, 11, Stems neuter in u : dyu ... 97 30

,y 12, Stems neuter in t2 ... ... 98 30

1^ 13. Declension of ^0 ••• ... 99 31

[ xiiii ]

scripts, and the works of Europeans as well as those which treat of special
questions of grammar like the complete grammars (Clougb, Mason). The
Pali literature already printed is so poor and so well known by specialists,
that, to us, it has seemed superfluous to cite the names of the editors of
texts that we have consulted.

It remains for us to perform the agreeable duty of testifying our
lively gratitude to the Academician M. A. Schiefner who has rendered the
greatest services during the printing of this work.

The End of the Introduction.

Chapters. Beciions. Pages*

XII 2. Imperfect {Par :) ..• ••• 162 to 164 57 & 58

„ 3. Potential (Par ;) ..• ... 165 to 167 58 to 60

4. Imperative [Par :) ... ... 168 to 172 60 & 61

,9 1. Present {Attanopadd) ... ... 173 62

99

2. Imperfect (^^^ ;) ... •.. 174 62

3. Potential (^^^ ;) ••• >.. 175 to 180 62 & 63

4. Imperative (AH.) ... ... 178 64

General Tenses ... ... ... 181 to 196 64 to 71

1. Redaplioated Perfect (Par : §• AH ; 181 & 182 64 & 65

2. Aorist (Par : 8f AH :) ... ... 183 to 188 65 to 68

3. Future (Par : 8f AU :) ... 189 to 194 68 to 70

4. Conditional {Par: * AU ;) ... 195 & 196 70 & 71
[Conjugation of BhQ] ... ... 71 & 72

Derivative Stems ... ... 197 to 211 73 to 76

1. Passive ... ... ... 197 to 203 73 & 74

2. Causative ... . ... ... 204 to 208 74 & 7«

3. Desiderative ... ... ... 209 & 210 76

4. Denominative ... ... 211 76

Conjugation of ^ti = hhii (forms not

included in § 161-196) ... 212 76 & 77

Participles ... ... ... 213 to 217 77 <l 78

,, Verbal Adjectives (see § 116) ... 218 & 219 78 A 79

,, Gerund ... ... ... ... 220 79

,, Infinitive ... ... ... 221 & 222 79

XIII OoMPOUND WoBDS ... ... 223 to 249 80 to 93

1. Dvandca ... ... ... 224 to 229 80 to 81

2. Tappurisa ... ... ... 230 to 233 82 to 86

3. Kammadhdraya ... ... 234 to 238 86 to 88

4. Digu ... ... ... 239 to 241 88

5. BahubHhi ... ... ... 242 to 245 83 to 91

6. Avyayibhdva ... ... 246 to 249 91 to 93

A sheet exhiliting the conjugation in full of a verb in each of tk$

seven conjugations is inserted between pages 72 and 73*
Postscript.
Errata.

>9

9}

99
99

9f
99
99
99
99

99
V

M

TABLE OF CONTENTS

» | — ti X t

1.

2.
9.
4.

5.
6.
7.

8.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.

• • •

• • •

• ••

• • •

• ••

• ••

• ••

• ••

• ••

• ••

• ••

• ••

• ••

• ••

• ••

I. PREAMBLE

II. Introduction
Bypotheses conceming the common cradle of the

Indo-Europeans
The Iranians and the Hindus
Mdra and Hairy o
Mythological conceptions of the Hindas regarding

the North : Uttarakuru, Bidd
Extention of the Aryans into India
The genealogy of the Sdkya kings
The legend aboat the emigration of the five sons of

king Apacaro ••• ••#

Heterodox Aryan tribes ; dasyu, asura
The language of these tribes, Sanskrit
Dialects; first monuments of the dialects •••
The Buddhist character of these monuments
The legend of iJ^ra^i ••• ••• «..

The relation of the dialects of the inscriptions with Pali.

The different names of Pali •••

The Buddhist fragments in two dialects

The primitive language of the Buddhist writings

The primitive constitution of the Sahgha

Sects in Buddhism ; their origin •••

The historical conditions of the development of Pali.

••fl

•••

«••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

• • •

•••

•t*

•••

Pages.

I— xliii

•••
m

iv

••

Vll

• ••

Till
IX

IX

• ••

XUl

xiv

XV
XV

xvii
xxiii

XXV
XXV
XXX

xxxiii
xxxvii

y^

C B 3

III. PALI GRAMMAR.

••• ••• •• t

••• •••

99
99

• t*

••• ••• •••

••• ••• •••

••• ••• •••

• •• •••

• •t

Sectiom.

Paget.

1 to

70

1 to20

1 to

6

1 to 4

7 to

46

4 to 14

8 to

15

4 to 6

16 to

20

6 & 7

21 to

46

7 to 14

47 to

70

14 to 20

47 to

62

14 to 16

Chapten,

I to VI PHONOLOGY

I Alphabet

II Comparative Phonology
Vowels
Diphthongs
Consonants

III to VI Sandhi

III The Meeting of Vowels
„ The Transformation of Vowels into

Semi vowels ••• ••• ... 53 to 56 16 & 17

ij The Insertion of Consonants between

Vowels ... ... ... 57 17 & 18

XY The Meeting of Niggahita with other

letters ... ... ... 58 to 64 18 to 19

V The Meeting of Vowels and Consonants. 65 to 67 19

VI The Meeting of Consonants... ... 68 to 70 20

VII to Xni MORPHOLOGY 71 to 249 20 to 93

VII Declension ... ... ... 71 to 148 20 to 51

yy i. Declension of Stems with a voicel ... 73 to 103 21 to 33

^y 1. Stems masculine in a ... ... 73 to 80 21 to 83

,y 2. Stems masculine in d ... ... 81 23

^y 3. Stems feminine in d ... ... 82 to 84 23 & 24

^y 4. Stems masculine in t ... ••• 85 <& 86 24 & 25

yy 5. Stems masculine in / ... ... 87 25 & 26

yy 6. Stems feminine in i, { ... ... 88 to 90 26 <& 27

,, 7. Stems neuter in «, / ... ... 91 87

,y 8. Declension of 5^M} ... ... 92 28

yy 9. Stems masculine inu, li ... 93 & 94 28 £ 29

,, 10. Stems feminine in u, ri ... 95 & 96 29 & 30

9, 11. Stems neuter in u : dyu ... 97 30

„ 12, Stems neuter in ti ... ... 98 30

9^ 13. Declension of ^0 ••• .*• 99 31

>9
^»

tf

99
9r
W

'99

C o ]

Chapten, Beciions^ Pajf99.

VII 14. Stems in u (S. ri) . . ... ... lOO to 103 31 to 35

ii. Declension of Stems witA a consonant .•• 104 to 121 33 to 40

1. Stems in (S. a») ... ... 105 33

2. Stems rn m ••• •»• ».. 106 33

3. Stems in an ... ..» ... 107 to 110 33 to 84

4. Stems in vat,m<U ..» ... Ill to 11& 35 & 36»
[Declension of gunava'] .«. 37
[Declension of gaccha] .^. 38

5. Stems in at ... ••» ••• 116 to 118 36

6. Declension oipuma ..♦ ^% 119 39^

7. Declension of ^aTnma ••• •«• 120 39

8. Declension of ^t/fa ..» .^. 121 40
Till Degrees of Comparisoa •*. ^.. 122 to 125 40 & 41

IX Pronouns ... ...- ..* 126 to 135 41 to 4T

1. Stem ainA<i ... ..^ .^. 126 41

2. Stem ^timAa .... .^.^ •«« 127 42

3. Stem ta .^ ..► ... 129 42

4. Stem eia .^^ ^^ ... 130 43

5. Stem ima ••* •«« •-• 131 44

6. Stem amu ..# ...^ ... 132 45

7. Stem yfl ... .^ ..• 134 46

8. Stem Aim ... .••^ ... 135' 47

X Pronominal Adjectives ... ... 136 to 140' 47 to 49^

XI Numerals ... ... ... 141 to 148 49 to 51

XII CoNJUGATioir ... .... ... 149 to 222 51 to 79

Classes of Verbs ... ... ... 149 to 156 51 to 531

Voices ... ... ••♦ ••• 157 53

Tenses ... ... ••♦ •^^ 159 53

Numbera .-•♦ •^'^ •^^ loo 53.

Inflexiona^ . ••• '^ •^•* ^^^ ®^'

Persons ... ... ••^ •*• 160/ 53;

[Paradigm of Conjugational and 2%m»

poral Inflexions of all verbal ... 54 & S5,

y. Par adigma of Verba .:.. ... 161 to 196 56 to 71'

„ Special Tenses ,.. ..• ... 161 to 178 56 to 63>

^ 1. Present {Parassapada},.^ ... 161 ^ 5ft

99

9*
99
9i

99
W

9n

[ ri J

explains the resemblance which certain passages of some canons exhibit by
the side of the general want of conformity to the division and title of the P.
parts.

Probably the Pali Tripitaka (P, Tipitaka) is to be considered as
one of the local canons. The language of this canon thus bears, as has
been seen above, the name of Mdgadhi.

Does this term proceed from the word that signifies singer or from
the name of the country?

This is a question that is easy to deoide.

As the first Buddhist monks may have had the custom of singing
the " word of Buddha/' — this is what the terms gdthdy geyd, applied to a
certain kind of Buddhist works bear witness to — it is likewise remarked in
the Prdtimoksha (P. Pdtimokkha) (1) that they abased this custom. It is
not every kind of singing that is permitted to be employed for the Vinaya^
ptaka. But, notwithstanding what has been said above, the following
facts will appear to us much more decisive for the expla^nation of the
term in question.

The beginnings of Buddhism are connected with Magadha.
According to tradition, it is there that Sakyamuni taught. It is thence
that the first preachers set out, thence that the sacred writings were trans-
ported to Ceylon. Subsequently, it is again in Magadha, that Buddha^
ghosa, the most important commentator of the Pali canon was bom.

There is no reason to doubt, that they may have written in Pali
in India itself. There is therefore no authority to reject absolutely the
tradition which attributes to Pali the name of the language of Magadha.
But Pali, as we have seen, is distinct from the dialect of the Bhabra in«
ficription and doubtless also from that of Magadha ; it differs too from the
MdgadM of the dramas and from that of the Jainas, The two last oiroum-
stances are explained by another appellation given to Pali by the Bud*
dhists. They say that Pali is '* the language of Buddha and not a secular
language." The origin of this designation is distinctly allied to the des*
tinies of the local dialect of Magadha in the bosom ot the Safigha or
monkish community.

XLII. It is from these conditions, in which Pali was developed in the

midst of the SaAgha, that this fact is understood, viz., that Pali grammar

(1), P. XMV. II-96,

•••

[ xli ]

presents, forms more ancient than those of the dialect of the Eastern in-
Bcriptions, the dialect which comes nearest to Pali, and that the differences
which distinguish it from the dialects of Magadha are at the same time
explicable.

In coarse of time, while the doctrine was developing, an oral
literature sprung up among the Buddhists ; but they were unwilling to
distinguish the new from the ancient and designated both by the term,
** word of Buddha/' Yet^ that the truth might not be easily disooveredi
that the new might seem old, it was altogether necessary, that, externally,
the one should not differ from the other in anything ; and the primitive
oral literature, most certainly, exercised an influence upon latter works.

Many circumstances favoured this inSuence. The monkish com-
munity was not composed exclusively of matured men. Novices were also
admitted and could even be consecrated from the age of four years.

^' I give permission, monks V says Buddha in the Mahdvagga,
*^ to consecrate a child of four years, if it is in the condition of chasing
crows.''

Anujanami bhikkhave anapafioavassam darakam kdkuochepakafn
pabbsjetun' ti.

New members could be born in the community itsel£ For this
purpose the following legend is related :

'* At that time, a certain pregnant woman was consecrated a nun.
Her pregnancy did not manifest itself till after her consecration. She set
herself athinking, '* what shall I do with this child P" The case was
submitted to Buddha, and he said, '* I give permission, monks ! to rear
this infant for this station, until it attains the age of reason," i. e. accord-
ing to the commentary : '' as long as he shall be unable to eat and bathe
by himself."

BhiikhunMbhanga : Tena kho pana samayena afifiatard itthi

eannisinnagabbha bhikkhunisu gabbajita hoti. Tassa pabbajitaya gabbho
vutthasi. Atha kho tassa bhikkhuniya etad ahosi kathan nu kho maya

imasmim darake patipajjittabban' ti, Bhagavato etam attham arocesum :

** Anujanami bhikkhave posetuw ySva so darako vififiutafn papunatiti."

Commentary : Tava khaditum bhufijitum nahayituii ca attano
dhammataya sakkotiti attho.

I B 1

Chapters^, Bections. Pages*

XII 2. Imperfect {Par :) ..• o. 162 to 164 57 & 58

3. Potential {Par :) •.. •.. 165 to 167 58 to 60

4. Imperative [Par :) ... ... 168 to 172 60 & 61

1. Present (Attanopadd) ... ... 173 62

2. Imperfect (AU .) •„ «.. 174 62

3. Potential (Att:) ... «. 175 to 180 62 & 63

4. Imperative (Ait-) ... ... 178 64

General Tenses ... ... ... 181 to 196 64 to 71

1. Redaplioated Perfect (Par .-S-ui/^- 181 & 182 64 & 65

2. Aorist {Par : 8f Att :) ... ... 183 to 188 65 to 68

3. Future {Par : 8f Att ;) ... 189 to 194 68 to 70

4. Conditional {Par: * Att :) ... 195 & 196 70 & 71
[Conjugation of Bhu] ... ... 71 & 72

Derivative Stems ... •». 197 to 211 73 to 76

1. Passive ... ... ... 197 to 203 73 & 74

2. Causative ... . ... ... 204 to 208 74 & 7«

8. Desiderative ... ... ... 209 & 210 76

4. Denominative ... ... 211 76

„ Conjugation of ^ti == hhi (forms not

included in § 161-196) ... 212 76 & 77

„ Participles ... ... ...213 to 217 77 A 78

„ Verbal Adjectives (see § 116) ... 218 & 219 78 A 79

,» Gerund ... ... ... ... 220 79

,, Infinitive ... ... ... 221 k 222 79

XIII Compound Wobds ... ... 223 to 249 80 to 98

9, 1. Dmndca ... ... ... 224 to 229 80 to 81

,9 2. Tappurisa ... ... ... 230 to 233 82 to 86

I, 3. Kammadhdraya ... ... 234 to 238 86 to 88

4. Digu ... ... ... 239 to 241 88

5. BahubUhi ... ... ... 242 to 245 83 to 91

6. Avyayihhdva ... ... 246 to 249 ^91 to 93

A sheet exhihiting the coY\jugation in full of a verb in each of tk$

seven conjugations i$ inserted between pages 72 and 73*
Postscript.
Errata.

99
9}

»
9f
}9
99
99

99

>l

99
99
99
91
99

9>
91
99

PALI GRAMMAR.

PHONOLOGY.

X. ALPHABET,

1. In writing Pali, people in Ceylon, Siam, and Burma employ
different alphabetical oharaoters to repraBent its forty-one sounds. The
following is a transliteration of the Pali letters in (1) Roman with corres-
ponding (2) Devan&gari and (3) Burmese oharaoters.

CONSOlfANTS.

n.ASSBS.

Abbupt.

Pewlosobd.

VOWELS.

n.upi.

rated.

i.pi.

rated.

lants.

1

1

vowelB,

1

^

s

1

1

luttnrali i

kh

h

ft

m

a
i

fl ■

i

2SJ

e

0@0

}..,..

■sUtall. '

i

Ob
«
CO

jl.

y

U5

!;:r.

Jeiebrali. •}

m

vs

Ri

8

8

dh

V

^

r r

l=v 11,

Jentala....

«

d

3

th

CO

dh

bb

CO

03

4

m

C3

.==-,«

^bisls...|

P
1

b

ph

1[

u

|,0 = % OO

Vatn.— Native Grammariang elMaify these sounds in another manner. P. 48.
Tbey teach, agreeRblr with Hindu Grammarians, (Cf. P&niai, 1,1,9) that, in order to.
■rtaoolata a eoond, three coaditions are neceBeary : Ist, the place vfaere it ia fonaed ;
Snd, the organ that prodaoes it ; 3rd, the effort which goTorsB its formation.

[ ri J

explains the resemblance which certain passages of some canons exhibit by

the side of the general want of conformity to the division and title of the P. z]

parts.

Probably the Pali Tripitaka (P, Tipitaka) is to be considered as
one of the local canons. The language of this canon thus bears, as has
been seen above, the name of MdgadhL

Does this term proceed from the word that signifies singer or from
the name of the country?

This is a question that is easy to deoide.

As the first Buddhist monks may have had the custom of singing
the " word of Buddha/' — this is what the terms gdthd, geyd^ applied to a
certain kind of Buddhist works bear witness to — it is likewise remarked in
the Prdtimoksha (P. Pdtimokkha) (1) that they abased this custom. It is
not every kind of singing that is permitted to be employed for the Vinaya^
ptaka. But, notwithstanding what has been said above, the following
facts will appear to us much more decisive for the ezpla^nation of the
term in question.

The beginnings of Buddhism are connected with Magadha.
According to tradition, it is there that Sakyamuni taught. It is thence
that the first preachers set out, thence that the sacred writings were trans-
ported to Ceylon. Subsequently, it is again in Magadha, that Buddha--
ghosa, the most important commentator of the Pali canon was bom.

There is no reason to doubt, that they may have written in P§li
in India itself. There is therefore no authority to reject absolutely the
tradition which attributes to Pali the name of the language of Magadha.
But Pali, as we have seen, is distinct fi:om the dialect of the Bhabra in«
ficription and doubtless also from that of Magadha ; it differs too from the
MdgadJii of the dramas and from that of the Jainas. The two last oiroum-
stanoes are explained by another appellation given to Pali by the Bud*
dhists. They say that Pali is '* the language of Buddha and not a secular
language." The origin of this designation is distinctly allied to the des*
tinies of the local dialect of Magadha in the bosom ot the SaAgha or
monkish community.

P, XLii. It is from these conditions, in which Pali was developed in the

midst of the SaAgha, that this fact is understood, viz., that Pali grammar

(1), P. xuv.ii-90, '~~' ^

[ 3 ]

III. The eff&rt$ required for the production of a sound differ also
cuDong themselves : 1st, a is formed by closing the throat (P. %amvuiam
^restrained = S. iamvfitam) ;

2Dd, the other vowels, along with 9, and h^ are formed by opening
^- Ihe throat (P. vivafam open = S. vivritam) ;

3rd, the consonants of the five classes, by contracting the organ
of the place where each sound is formed (P. phuffham affected = S. spri'

4th, the semivowels y, f, /, r, by slightly contracting the organ
cf the place where each sound is formed (P. tiupphuffham slightly affected
S. iahatsprishfam) (1).

All the grammars do not agree about the number of places where P. 49.
the sounds are formed. The Mukhamattadipini (2) reckons five of them :
the throat, the palate, the roof of the palate, the teeth, and the lips. The
Nimtti (3) adds to them the chest (P. ura = S. uras), and the root of the
tongue (P. Jivhdmuia).

2. I is only a modification otd. Kacc&yana always replaces it by /«

La-karam pana da-k^ravik^am katvsk saddasatthavidQ pathanti

suttakaro pan' assa thane la-karam eva pathati (4). But

when those skilled in grammar change the letter d, thejr read the letter 1 ;
a copyist or writer (lit. maker) of the suttas even writes (lit reads) I in 4,^%
place.

3. The consonants are divided; (A). 1st, into the surd or
strong (P. aghosd) ; and 2nd, the sonant or soft (P. ghoed).

The first are h, jkhy c, cA, f, tK ^> ^A« P; pA, «.
The sonant or soft are all the other letters of the five classes, y^
r, /, «?, A, and /.

(B). 1st, into aspirates {dhanitd lit, sound, noise) : the third
and fouith of each class in the table on page 1 ; and 2nd into non-aspi-
rates, the first and second of each class.

(1). Bupasiddhi, i. 1, 2.
(2). Ms. of the India office, i. 1, 2.

(3). This work is quoted in the Kaccdyanava^^}cmdf 1. 1, 2. Ms, of the National
Library of Paris,

(4). Muhhamattadipani, page kr, at the back, Cf. SiddharUcLkaumitdi ix. 512,

t 4 ]

4. The eight vowels are divided into short and long.

The short are : a^uu ; the long are the other five ; 4 i, ti, e^ o.

5. Sometimes e and o are pronounced as short vowels. It is
when they are found before two consonants : for example, in the words
etthaf (8. atra)^ here ; sei/t/Oj (S. grfiyas)^ better.

6. Before a group of consonants, the short and long take the
name oi heavy vowels (P. guru).

Note. — The niggahUam, exerts over tbe vowels, the same influence
that a collocation of consonants exercises over them. Thus, we read in the
MoggalldyanavuUi, page kd, on the back : bindu niggahUam, the mark
niggahita,
P. 4. Yv ayam vanno bindumatto so niggahitasafifio hoti. Tena k?

attho niggahitam ice adigurusannakaranam, etc. (1).

II. — Comparative Phonology.

7. The sounds of a language may be studied from two points
of view :

Firstf i^ historical with the purpose cf showing the transfonna«
tions of one sound in the cognate languages. This is the object of com"
parative philology* In this work, the sounds of Pali will be compared with
those of Sanskrit, which is the language most closely allied to it, and whose
phonology presents the most archaic condition of sounds.

Second, the grammatico-physiological, i.e. by studying the physi- P. 50

ology of sounds (what has been briefly done in the first paragraphs) and

their modifications^ as well external (the meeting of words in a discourse),

as internal (the junction of the root and of stems with suffixesi other stems,

or inflexions).

Vowels.

8. Pali does not possess the following Sanskrit vowels : w, ri ;
^, ri ; «, «, Iri ; w, ^, Irl ; ^, , ai ; dA au. The other eight vowels
a, dy t, ^ u, t^, e, have, with regard to Sanskrit ones, undergone much
less change than the consonants.

9. The vowel a corresponds, in most cases, to the Sanskrit a.
Sometimes, it replaces a Sanskrit d {\) before two consonants or before
niggdhita ; e. g. in words such as patta (S. patra), a cup ; magga (S.
marga), a path ; (2) in the accusative singular of feminine stems in d :

(1). This letter which is a mere dot is termed niggahita. Then what need
of making it the primary heavy sign F etc.

r 5 ]

P. 5. kafifiaw (S. kanyaw), aco. sing, of kafifia (S. kanya). a young girl ; (3) in

the genitive plural of masculine stems in a : purisauaw (S. purushanam), ^7a¥l
gen. plur. of purisa (S. purusha), a man.

10. A corresponds, at other times, with the Sanskrit vowels i, ei,
ri] e. g. (1) in pathavl (S, prithivi), the earth ; (2) kibbasa (8. kilvisha),
sin ; (3) pana (S. punai'), again ; (4) satima (S. smritimat), who remembers ;
amata (S. amrita), immortal; kata (S. krita), done; dalna (S. dridha),
solid ; kasi (S. krishi), tillage.

11. The long vowel a corresponds to the Sanskrit a, at the end
of words, after the dropping of a consonant : e. g. (1) braha (S. brahat),
great ; (2) puna (for punad=S, punar) ; again in the sentence, na hi dani
puna atthi mama tuyhau ca saAgamo ; now there is no more intercourse
for us two {Salasdjdtakamj page phah, on the face).

12. Sometimes, i replaces the Sanskrit z, before a group of con-
sonants 01 niggahifa : e. g. (1) in the words tittha ( S. tirthas), a place where
people bathe, a ghat ; kitti (S. kirti), glory ; and (2) in the acc« sing, of
stems in i.

13. Besides, i = Sanskr. a, ti, ri, e, ai : ex. (1) pitthito (S. prish-
thatas), from behind ; (2) saddhim (S. sa.rddha;;0> together ; (3) purisa
(S. purusha), a man ; (4) isi (S. rishi), a sage ; (5) dissati (S. dri(?yati), ho
sees ; (6) kiccha (S. kriochra), need ; (7) talavantaka (S. talavrintaka), a
fan ; (8) pativissaka (S. prativegyaka), a neighbour ; (9) issariya (S. ai<5-
varya), dominion. Now and then it happens, % arises from the vocalisa-
tion of the semivowel y \ e. g. in nigrodha (S. nyagrodha); the banyan or
Indian fig tree.

14. / = S. iy after the dropping of a consonant ; ex. nlyanti
(S. nir + ya), the 3rd pers. plur. of the present, they are going away ; (2)
^ =: S. ai\ ex. thina (S. staina), theft.

15. The vowel u corresponds to the Sanskrit u and to ii before
two consonants ; e. g. sutta (S. sutra), sacred word ; or before niggahUa.
Besides, ti = S. «, ^, rh o. M\ e. g. (1) puthujjano (S. prithag + jana), P. 51.
ignorant; (2) susana (S. (^^mac^Sna), a cemetery; (3) usu (S. ishu), an
arrow ; (4) susu (8. qiQu), an infant ; (5) itveva (S. iti + eva), thus ; (6)
mufl^vada (8. mrishavada), falsehood; (7) puttha (8. prishta), questioned ;
(8) uju (S. riju), right, straight ; (9) usabha (S. rishabha), a buffalo ; (10)

C 6 ]

aggi hutta;>a (S. agnihotra) a sacrifice ; (11) junha (S. jyotsna), moonlight ;
(12) xnanuiinam (S. manojiiam), beautiful, fine ; e. g. rudam manuQfiafii,
rucira oa pitthi, singing charmingly and (having) a variegated back (Jat
I. 4, 2); the commentary has: manunua?n = manapawi; the B'dpasiddhi
(44) I, 5, 8, cites a manu^nnam = mano aMam ; (13) ussukka (S. autsukja),
strong desire.

In Pali an u may arise from the vocalisation of f ; e. g. turita
hastening (S. tvarita from tvar^ to hasten) ; na supami divarattim (Jat, xvii.
1^ 2); I sleep not day or night : supami (S. svap, svapimi).

Diphthongs.

P. 6. 16. Of the Sanskrit dipthongs two, e and o only, are retained in

Pali, and they are sometimes short (Of. § 5). They almost always corres-
pond to the Sanskrit diphthongs e, ai, o, au. But e moreover = S. a and

i; e. g. (l)ettha (S. atra), here; (2) pure (S. puras), before; (3) hettha (8.

adhastat), under; (4) gahetva (S. grihitva), having taken; (5) netva

(S.nitva), having conducted.

17. Sometimes e in Pali arises from the sound of t/ being vocal-
ised into i and combined vrith a preceding or following a ; e. g. (1)
macchera (S. matsarya), envy ; selfishness ; (2) acchera (S. a^carya), a
miracle ; (3) katheti (S. kathayati), he relates (4) vancesi (S. vaficayasi),
thou deceivest. At other times, e proceeds from a + i, by the elimination
of an intermediate i7 ; e.g. thera (S. sthavira), an aged nun who has
embraced the monastic life for many years and is distinguished for her
sanctity.

18. The diphthong o, as well as e^ may be, both short and long*
It corresponds to the Sanskrit o, au, and as final, and, further replaces a
Sanskrit u : e. g. (1) porisa, posa (S. purueha), a man ; (2) ottha (S.
UBhtra)« a camel ; (3) sovannamaya (S, suvarnamaya), golden^ (4) tanotha
(S. tanutha), ye stretch.

19. Oin Pali, sometimes arises from the sound of v being vooal-i
isedintoef and combined with a preceding or following a: e. g. (1) lona
(S. lavana), salt ; (2) osana (S. avasana), the end ; (3) okkhitta (S. ava +
kship), cast down ; (4) oruhya (S. ava + ruh), being descended ; (5) sotthi
(S. svasti), well-being ; (6) juhonti (or juhvanti = S. juhvanti), they offer
a sacrifice ; (7) tanonti (S. tanvanti), they stretch.

C 7 ]

Again o sometimes arises from a + uhj the dropping of an inter-
mediate y : e. g. mora (S. mayura), a peacock.

20. The Sanskrit vowel ri is sometimes represented in Pali by r
followed by a, i, or u ; e. g. (1) braha (S. brihat), great ; (2) iru (S. rig)

Terse ; (3) rukkha (S. vriksha), a tree.

Consonants. P. 52.

21. The comparison of consonants in Pali and Sanskrit shows
7. that, in the great generality of instances, Pali avoids the meeting of two

consonants of dissimilar organs, and has recourse to assimilation, omission^
and the insertion of vouels,

22. When two consonants meet in the middle of a word, that
which precedes is assimilated to that which follows, provided, that the
latter is neither a nasal^ a semivotcel, nor a sibilant. In the second instance,
different changes are observed : the semivowel may be (i) assimilated to
the preceding consonant, (ii) dropped, or (iii) may transform the consonant
into one of another organ.

(a) Gutturals.

23. The gutturals correspond almost always to those of Sanskrit
The surd aspirate kh of this class, is often due to the presence of

a sibilant or an r in Sanskrit.

It is probable, that, before disappearing, the sibilant has in some
cases undergone metathesis. It is this that takes place in the Mdgadhi of
the dramas {Hemacandra iv. 298). For example, the Sanskrit word
prekshate, he looks at, takes, in this dialect, the form peskadi. In Pali, the
sibilant is dropped and has left a trace in the aspiration of the guttural :
pekkhati. Again, the redoubling of the consonant does not exist upon the
inscriptions of Piyadasi, It is probably due to the grammatical elabora-
tion of Pali and may be considered as relatively recent. Very often it does
not occur in verse : ex. {Jdt xv. i> 1.) ; kim kamma;/} akari pubbe papain
attadukhdvaham, who has first committed this wicked deed which recoils
on its author P {Jdt^ xvi. i) 1 ) ; itthinam purisanafi ca m& te dsi dukhudayo
[for men and women let not the beginning of sorrow come upon thee].

It is equally from the dropping of the sibilant, that the aspirated
surd is produced in (i; yakkha (S.yaksha)^ a kind of demon, (2) khippa

C 8 ]

(S. kshipra) rapid ; (3; bhikkhu (S. bhikshu), a mendicant; (4) oakkhu
(S. oakshus), the eye ; and in many other words.

24. Under the influence of r, the aspirate kh is produced in
words such as (1) khidda, which is, however, met under the form kfla
(S. krida), play; (2) purakkhata (S. puraskrita), marching in front ; (3)
nikkhamma or nikkhamitva (S. nishkramya, from nis + kram), having
gone out. In the last two examples, however, the aspiration may be attri-
buted to the influence of the sibilant, for the root kram joined to other
prefixes, does not exhibit the aspirate : e. g (1^ pakkama (S. prakrama), a
pace; (2) patikkama (S. pratikrama), reverse order; etc.

Sometimes, the sibilant is assimilated to the following consonant,
as, in the words (1) dukkara (S. dushkara), difficult to do ; (2) namakkara
(S. namaskara), homdge ; and» in this case, the aspiration does not occur.

P. 8. 25. The nasal is assimilated to the guttural which precedes it :

e. g. (1) sakkoti, 3rd pers. sing, of the present of saky to be able (S. P. 5
^aknoti) ; (2) lagga (S. lagna), adhering ; (3) aggi (S. agni), fire ; (4)
nagga (S. nagna), naked ; etc.

26. The semivowels p, r, /, t?, are assimilated to the preceding or
following guttural : ex. (1) sakka (S. ^akya), the Sakyas, (2) akkhata (S.
Slkhyata) told ; (3) sakko (S. ^akra) Qakra or Indra ; (4) makkata (S. mar-
kata), a monkey ; (5) vakkala (S. valkala), tree- bark ; (6) sobhagga
(S. saubhagya), happiness ; (7) agga (S. agra), a summit ; (8) sagga
(S. svarga), heaven ; (9) vaggu (8. valgu), beautiful ; (10) aggha (8. argha)
sacrifice ; etc.

Sometimes the semivowel remains : ex. (1) s^kyaputtiko (S.
^dkyaputra), or sakiya (8. <,'akya), of the Sakya race; (2) saAkhya (S.saA*
khya), number ; (3) arogya (S. arogya), health ; ^4) nigrodha (8. nyagro-
dha) ; (see § 22) ;

atha 'brav! braha Indo Vatrabhu .... then, the great Indra^
the conqueror of Vritra (P. Vatta), said .... {Jat. xvi. i. 3) ;

atha kena vannena utrase so migo mama/;i, how could this deer

trouble me P

kv attho what need of P = ko (S. kah) + attho (S. arthah) ; etc.

The nasals remain imchanged be/ore gutturals or are changed
into niggahita * ex. pallaiika (S. paryaAka) a oouoh> a palanquin ; aftga
(8. afiga) a limb etc. (see § ii).

C 9 ]

V

(b) Palatals.

27. The Pali palatals correspond to those of Sanskrit, or arise
from dentals, under the influence of a following y: e. g. (1) (P.) c =f (S.)
t in adicca (S. aditya), the sun ; paocaya (S. pratyaya), a cause ; (2) (P.)
ch = (S.) th in miooha (S. mithya), falsely; (3) (P.) j = (8) din avijja
(S. avidy a), ignorance ;jotamana (S. dyotamana), brilliant; (4) (P.)jh =
(8) dh in jhSna (8. dhyana), contemplation ; jhama (8. dhyama), black ;
(5) (P.) w = (S.) n in anna (S. anya), other ; kafifia (8. kanya), young
girl ; (6) (P.) n = (8.) n in pufiiia (8. punya), purity ; hirafifia (S,
hiranya), gold.

28. The palatals spring from gutturals under the influence of
sibilants .- ex. (1) kucchi (8. kukshi), the stomach ; (2) tacchaka (8. taksh*
aka); a carpenter. It is, moreover, to the sibilant that aspiration is here due.

The palatals are also formed from dentals when the latter have a
sibilant after them .- ex. (1) maechari (8. matsarim), envious ; (2) vicikiccha.
(S. vicikitsa), doubt. (Cf. § 22).

29. In some cases, the palatals arise from sibilants : ex. (1)
acohara (8. apsaras), a celestial nymph; (2) chattha (8. shashta), sixth. The
fiibilanf causes the aspiration of the palatal surd {eh. for c) .* ex. (1) paccha
(8. pa^cat), after ; (2) acchera (8. a<?carya), wonderful ; etc.

The sibilant may be assimilated to a following palatal * ex. (1)
duocarita (8. du(?carita), who acts badly ; (2) nicoala (S. ni^oala), unmoy-
able ; (3) ducchanna (8. du9channa); ill-covered. (Gf. § 21)

The aspirate ch may correspond to (S) p ; ex. chakana (8. 9akrit)|
excrement; tattha nam raja matupacchato gaochantim hatthicchakana-
pindena pitthiyam pahari {Jdt xix. i, 1) ; then the king struck it behind
with a piece of elephant's dung as it followed its mother.

30. The other consonants, in their meeting with palatals follow
the general rule. (Cf. § 21). The semivowels are assimilated to the
preceding palatal : (1) pacoati (8. pacyate), it ripens ; (2) muccati (8. muc«
yate), it is delivered ; (3) bhesajja (8. bhaishajya), medicine. (Cf. § 22).

(<?) Cerebrals.

31. In Pali, the cerebrals often correspond to the Sanskrit
dentals and undergo this transformation under the influence of the sounds

t 10 3

riy r, s, preceding the dental ; ex.(l) pati (8. prati), against; (2) pathama
(S. prathama), first; (3) talavantaka (S. talavrintaka), a fan; (4) tha-
pita (S. sth^pita), placed ; (5) attha, atta^ or attha (S. artha) ; signifioatioQ.

32. Under the influence of a sibilant, the Sanskrit t is aspirated
in Pali : ex. (1) tuttha (S. tushta), rejoiced ; (2) attha (S. ashtau), eight ;
(3) duttha (S. dushta), corrupted ; the exception is leddu (8. leshtu), a olod
of earth.

33. The soft aspirate dh of the cerebral class corresponds to the
Sanskrit d, dh, and is developed under the influence of a preceding r : ex.

(1) anukaddhana (S. anu + kard) referring back ; (2) vaddhate (S. var-
dhate), he grows.

The letter Z is only a modification of d and corresponds to the
Sanskrit d, d, p: ex. (I) ohal-abhififia (S. shad +abhijf[a) ; the six super-
natural faculties ; (2) chal-ayatanaw, (S. shad + ayatanam), the six organs
of sense ; (3j ulara (8. udara), noble; (4) talaka fS. tadaga), a tank ; (5)
vulhate or vuyhati (S. uhyate), is carried. (Of. § 2).

Ih = Sanskrit dh : e. g. in the words (1) dalha (8. dridha), strong ;

(2) virQlhaka (8. virudhaka) — Virulha or VirQlhaka, a proper name ;

(3) gulha (8. gadha), hidden.

34. Sometimes n is found in the place of w (palatal) in the deri-
vatives of S. d + jiia ; ex. anapesi, he has ordained, and very often, in Jlfw,,
in the place of ?i (dental).

The grammars give no rule for this last change.

{d) Dentals.

35. The dental surd t sometimes corresponds to the Sanskrit
sonant d of the same class : ex. (1) kusita (8 .kusida), indolence ; (2^pUu-
bhavanti (8. pradurbhavanti), they become manifest ; (3) yasmat iha
(S. yasmad iha), because here ; (4) tasmat iha (8. tasmad iha) , therefore here.

In the last two instances, grammarians consider the t a eaphonio
letter intended to avoid an hiatus.

Sometimes ^ ;= 8. c : ex. tikicchaka (8. oikitsaka)^ a doctor.

Finally t=^8.th : e. g. in katika^ talk (S| kath + ik&, see the
word in Childers' Pali Dictionary).

T 11 1

c Amhakam katikavattam bhindltva, kasm^ akale ^gat& 'ti {Jdt.

page pa, nau, on the face). Putting an end to our course of converBation,
(he said)^ why have ye come together at an unseasonable hour P'

36. The aspirated surd th of this class sometimes corresponds to
the Sanskrit unaspirated surd t and is developed under the influence of an
r or a sibilant : ex. (I) tattha (S. tatra), there ; (2) yattha (S. yatra), where.

After the dental, the r may be also assimilated without producing
the aspiration : ex. (1) mitta (S. mitra), a friend ; (2) putta (S. putra), a
son; (3) matta (S. matra), a measure ; (4) sotthi (8. svasti)^ well-being ;
P. 10. (5) thananti (S. stananti), they make a noise ; (6) hattha (8. hasta), a
hand ; (7) thiyo (nom. pi. of thi, ordinarily itth!, a woman = 8. stri) in
Jdtakay yiii, i, 6 :

Thiyo tassa pajayanti na puma jayare kule I

Yo janam puochito panha;^) anfiatha na;n viyakare ||

*' It originates only from women and not from men^ in the family
of him who knowingly answers a question by a lie."

37. The unaspirated sonant d occasionally corresponds to the
S./: ex. (1) daddallamana (S. jajvalyamana), brilliant; (Cf. FausboU,
Dasarathajdtakay p. 29) ; (2) dosina (S. jyotsni, Of. Weber, Bhagavatiy r,
413) dear, bright.

Ramaniya vata bho dosind ratti. {Jdt xxi. i, 7) ;

How pleasant a clear night is I—

or to the S. dh : ex. ida (S. idha), here ; P. 55.

or to the S. t : ex. dandha (S. tandra) : idle.

Kalamigo 'pi attano dandhataya, im^ya nama velaya gantabbam
imaya na [velaya, Cf. FausbolL Jdt, II, p. 144, 1. L] gantabban'ti, aja-
nanto (Jdt. i, ii, 1) ; even the black deer (or beast, here Devadatta) thro' his
slothfulness did not know (lit. not knowing) the seasonable or unseason-
able time to go ; (3) mutifiga (S. mridaAga), a drum; vidatthi (S- vitasti),
the elbow.

The dental nasal n sometimes replaces I : ex. nafigala (S. laAgala),
a plough.

38. When the semivowel t/ is found placed immediately after a
dental; it transforms the dental into a palatal (Of. § i7), or, following

[ 12 ]

the general rule, is aseimilated to it: (Cf. § 21) ex. (1) uyyana (S. udj^na),
a garden ; (2) uyyoga (8. udyoga), labour.

The nasal is assimilated to the dental that precedes it : ex. attS,
(S. atman), the soul.

(e) Labials.

39. The aspirated surd ph of this olass sometimes corresponds to
the S. unaspirated 8\irip:ex. (1) pharasu (S. parai^u), a hatchet ; (2)
phalita, but also palita (S. palita)^ grey ; (3) phussaratha (8. pushyaratha),
a processional car. In certain words the aspirate is easily explained by
the dropping of the sibilant : ex. phassa (S. par(;:a), to touch.

40. The unaspirated sonant b of this class = (8) t; : ex. (1)
pabbajja (8. pravrajya), consecration ; (2) giribbaja (8. giri + vraja),
Giribbaja, the name of a mountain ; (3) dibbami (S. divyami), I sport ; (4)
kabya (S. kavya). a poem.

The aspirated sonant bh corresponds to the Sanskrit v : ex. bhisa
(8. visa)^ the film or fibres of the stalk of the water lily : in certain rare
cases, it corresponds to the (8) h ; ex. mittadubhi (8. mitradruh)^ envious
(Of. FansboU, Dasarathajdtaka^ p. 23).

The nasal m of this class is sometimes = (S) y : ex. s&mam or
sayam (S. svayam) , self. The long syllable in the first part of the word is
explained by the dropping of the semivowel.

(/) Semivowels.

41. Semivowels y^ r, ly v. In Pali, y ordinarily corresponds to
the (8) yy and, in some rare instances, to the palatal sonant y : ex. (1)
niya or nija (8. nija), own ; |/ = S. c^ in khayita (8. khadita), eaten.

The F. r = 8. 9* after the prefixes ni (8. nis), out, du (8. dus),
ill, badly ; in the words catu (8. catur), four; patu (S. prddur), evidently ;
puna (8. punar), again ; pata (8. pratar), at dawn ; and in many other words^
before a vowel : ex. (1) nirantaraT/i (8. nirantaram), without an interval:
P. 11. (2) duragatam (S. duragataw), come with difficulty ; (3) punar eva (S.
punar eva), again ; etc.

Besides r = S. g, t, d, n : ex. (1) dhir astu, let woe befaU, it
cannot be helped (8. dhig astu), an exclamation of despair ; (2) makkara (S.
markata), a monkey ; (3) ekarasa or ekadasa (8. ekada(?a), eleven ; (4) iH
the word jivar = jivan (8. jivan) living; the r replaces the n. Cf. Jdt
vm. I. 7.

[ 13 ]

Yo indrijanam kamena vasam Narada gacchati; so pariccajj 'abho
loke jfvar eva visussati.

*' Who ever, Nalrada t yields to his wishes with his entire will,
his whole being will be dried up after he has quitted the two worlds."

Tassa dajjam imam selam jalantar iva tejas^ (Jat. xxi. i, 6). "I
shall give him this stone which, through its brightness, seems to shine."

Yijju mahameghar iv^nupajjatha (Jat. xx. i. 3).

As a flash of lightening, it has sunk into a great cloud."

Finally, r = (S) /: ex. picura (S. picula), the Indian tamarisk.

The (P) I may correspond to the (S) r : ex. (1) pallaAka (S. par-
yafika) a palanquin ; (2) antalikkha (S. antariksha), the sky ; (3) oattalisam
(S. catvariwi(?at), forty.

It may also correspond to the (S) d: ex. bubbulaka (S.budbuda)i
a bubble. In the words (I) alia (8. ardra), wet ; (2) cuUa (S. kshudra),
small, it replaces the (S) r.

The semivowel v, besides the instances in which it answers to the
S. V, replaces the (S) p, 6, m, and y : ex.

(1 ) Godavaritire tiyojanikam kavitthavanam (S. kapitthavanam)
sandhaya payasi. (JdL xvi. 1, 2) Having made ready, he advanced to the
Kavittha (the name of the tree Feronia Elephantum) woods of three
yojanas (in diameter) on the banks of the Godavari. [The French
translation is : *' il partit, se proposant de se rendre dans le bois des kavit-
tha ", he started, intending to proceed to the K woods].

^2) Vihemi (for bhayami) v*etaw asadum {Jdty xvi. i, 3) :

I fear approaching him ; (3) vima;r<samana (S. vimamsamana) in*
vesti^ating ; (4) tavatimsabhavana (S. trayastrim^abhavana), the abode of
the thirty-three deities ; (5) kasava (S. kashaya) yellow ; (6) avusa (S. ayu-
shmat), friend !

42. In the middle of a word, in the combinations hy, hv, there
is a metathesis of the semivowels : ex., guyha (S. guhya) (1) a secret ; (2)
bavhabadho (S. bahu + abadha), much sickness; (3) gadrabha (S. garda-
bba), an ass.

When two semivowek meet they also undergo metathesis ; ex.
kayirati (S. kriyati), it is done.

[ 14 ]

{g) Sibilants and A.

43. In Pall, ono sibilant only is prescryed, the dental 5, which
corresponds otymologically to the (S) ^ n^ sh ^, s ^.

The Pali h corresponds to the Sanskrit h or arises from the aspi-
rates 6A, dh : ex. (I) hi, the inflexion of the instrumentive plur, (S. bhis) ;

(2) pahiita (S. prabhuta), much ; (3) paggalha (S. pragalbha)> brave ; (4)
sadhu or sabu (S. sadha), good ! (5) hcttha (S. adhastat), below (in this
word the initial a is dropped). It also replaces the (S) kh : ex. tayo 'pi
suhita (S. sukhita) ahesum (Jdt. xx. i, 4) ; all three were contented.

44. The S. sibilants f, sh, s, very often become h in Pali : ex.
(1) panha (S. pra^na), a question ; (2) amhamana (S. a^mamaya), ston^ ;

(3) tanha (S. trishna), thirst; (4) kanha (S. krishna), black; (5) iinha
(S. ushiia), hot; (6) nahana or nhaiia — such is the form of this word in
Burmese and Siamese niaDuseripts, (S. snana), a bath; (7) nahapita (S.
napita from rf. snapitar, Of. Weber, Beitr : z. vgl. Spr., I, 505), a barber.

n is also found = S, y ; ex, nahuta (S. nayuta), ton thousand
quadrillions ( IO,000,OOO^V

In groups formed by h with a nasal, there is metathesis : of which
examples have been seen above (§ 44).

{h) NiGGAHITA.

45. Niggnhtta, in Pali (answering to the S. anusvdra)^ at the
end or in the middle of words, sometimes corresponds to the S. r • ex,

Cakkhum udiipadi (S. cakshur udapat), the eye has revealed
itself ; ukka»/sa (S. utkarsha), exaltation ; etc.

(0 Vowel insertion.

46. Besides the assimilation or omission of a consonant, Pali has
recourse to the insertion of one of the vowels a, i, or w, in order to avoid tho
collocation of two or more consonants (Of. § 22) : ox. (1) ratana (S. ratnsi),
a precious stone ; (2) rahada (S. hrada), a lake ; (3) arahati (8. arhaii), ho
is worthy; (4) hiri (S. hrl), shame; (5) siuoha (S. sneha), love; (G)
kilittba (S. klishta), tormented ; (7) sukhuma (S. sukshma), small ; etc.

III.— [Sandiii]. (a) The Meeting of Vowels.

47. The meeting of two vowels of tho same organ gives rise to
a long oncy as well in the middle of a compound word; as in a seoteocey

[15 ]

when a word terminated by a vo\\el, is followed by another word which
commences with the same vowel : ex. (I) buddliuimsaii (S. buJdha +
anusmriti), the remembrance of Buddha; (2) yduidha bhatuui, the beings
that are found here.

48. a (a) + t form the diphthong e ; a (a) + u {li) form the
diphthong o : ex. (I) npeto (upa + ita = S. upeta), a muni ; (2) yathodako
(yatha + udake); as in the water

49. K final vowel may be dropped before an initial one : ex. (1)
lokaggapuggalo (loka + aggapuggalo), the most exalted being of the
world ; (2) yass' indriyani samatham gatani, those whoso senses arc com-
posed (tranquilised) ; (3) tln'imani, these three ; (4) samct' ayasma (samotu
+ ayasma), lot the venerable agree ; (5) dhanam m'atthi (mo + atthi), 1
have riches ; (6) asant' cttha na dissati (asanto + ettha) no being deprived
of existence is seen here.

50. The vowel may remain unchanged, whether before another
vowel of the same organ or not, as in the examples .(1) yassa idani, for
whom now ? (2) chaya iva, as a shadow ; etc.

Generally, the hiatus is allowed in the following cases :

1st. For the inflection of the vocative, save before iti: ex.
katama Ananda aniccasauna, what representation of perishability ?
Ananda !

Pali Mahdvagga. PucchSmi tarn Kassappa etam atiham I

Katha/>^ pahiuam tava aggibuttam ||

SansiriL Mahdvastu, Pricchami to Kdgyapa etam artha?>i i

Kathaw prahinaMi tava agnihotraw ||

I ask thee, Kassapa ! how thy sacrifice has vanished?
Sometimes, even in this case, for the exigencies of metre, the
vowels may follow the rules of sandhL

2nd. A long final vowel does not undergo any modification before
an initial vowel, if the two words do not form a compound tcord (see Chapter
xiii) : ex. (1) dyasmd Anando gatham abhasi, the venerable Ananda has
recited a verse ; (%) hhdtmddi atthavadi 'yam itthi, this woman speaks
rightly and truly.

[ 16 ]

Pali. Yo dhiro sabbadhidanto Sanskrit. Yo viro dhritisampanno
Suddho appatipuggah I Dhyayi apratipudgalo I

Araha77i sugata loko Arham sugato loke

Tassaham paricarako || Tasyaha/;) paricarako'H

^' I am the servant of him who is strong and who has overcome
all the torments, who is pnro and has not his peer, who is honoured in the
world, and whose advent is desired by mankind."

3rd. At the end of particles, the vowel undergoes no change :
ex. are aham 'pi ... , ah ! me also ••• ; atha kho ayasma ••• , and then the
venerable ••• .

4th. Before a word beginning with a or one of the words iti,iva,
evOy eithtty etc, the final vowel of the preceding word follows the rules of
Sajidhi : ex. (1) agat 'attha (agato + attha), he is come here; (2) itthiti
(itt hi + iti) as a woman, or it is a woman ; (3) sv eva (so + eva) even he,
this very man ; (4) n'etiha (na + ettha) isim, that is not here ; etc (Gf. §
49).

5th. Before verbs, i and u may continue unchanged : ex. (1)
gathahi ajjhabhasi, he replied in (these) verses ; (2) satthu adasi, ho gave
(it) to the master.

51. When two vowels meet, the second (i. e. the initial one)
may be dropped : ex. (1) yassa 'dani (in place of idani), for whom now ?
(2) assamani 'si (for asi), thou art not a samani; (3) akatafifiQ 'si (for
asi), thou art ungrateful.

52. The vowel that remains may be lengthened, uhether it is
initial or final: ex. (1) appassut' ayaw, that ignorant one (Of. § 49) ; (2)
lokassa 'ii * for the world ' (3) vijju 'va (for iva) like lightning.

III. (ft). The Transformation of Vowels into Semivowels.

53. The vowel i becomes y before other vowels ; ex. vyakato
(S. vyakrito), explained, declared.

It is the same, in Pali, with e before the vowel a in the words te^

me, ye^ etc.

It is known, that, in Sanskrit, e is developed into ay before vowels.
Now, in Pali, when this diphthong e is transformed into f/, the succeeding
vowel is lengthened, as, in (1) my aya;w (mo + aya//i) ; (2) ty aham (te

C 17 ]

aham ; (3) yy Sssa (ye -f assa). The elongation may therefore be
explained from the meeting of two a'^^ by siip^osiag 9l metathesis oi ay
into ya* (e = ai = ay ) .

54. To avoid a hiatus, a j/ is inserted between i (0 and a follow-
iDg vowel, and this vowel may itself be lengthened : ex. (1) aggiyagare
(aggi + agare), in the habitation of fire ; (2) sattamiyatthe (sattami +
atthe), in the sense of the seventh case (the locative).

55. The vowel u becomes v^ when it is fonnd before any other
vowel except u: ex. (1) anvaddhamasam^ in a half month; (2) anveti, it
follows ; (3) svagatam^ welcome •

Finally, to avoid the hiatus^ a v may farther be inserted between
the u and the following vowel : ex. duvaAgika;/}; he who has two members ;
bhikkhuvasane, in the dwelling of a monk.

66. The diphthong o becomes av^ as in Sanskrit^ in the word go^
an ox ; ex, gavelakam, sheep and oxen.

The a of av may be dropped : e. g. in the words (1) ko (S. kah),
who ? (2) kho (S. khalu), truly ; (3) yo (S. yah), he who ; (4) so (8. sah),
that one ; and in vpords terminated by to (S. tas), when they are followed
by a word whose initial letter is a vowel : ex. kv attho, what signification ?

This a may also become u : ex.

Kuv idha papena lippati {Jat xvii, i, 3). who is here defiled by sin P

III. (c) The insertion of Consonants between Vowels.

57. Fsbli very frequently allows the hiatus, but, sometimes to
avoid it, resorts to the insertion of a letter. (Cf. §§54 and 55).

1st. A y is inserted (i) in the middle of a word after ri, away ;
parij around etc, : ex. viyafijana, a consonant ;

(ii) at the end of a word : ex. (1) yathay idaiftj like this ; (2)
na^ idam, not so ;

(iii) after a consonant : ex. taf^^ yidam, this, the same.

2nd, A t? is inserted between ti, three, and words commencing
with a or u: ex. (1) tivaAgalaw, three-fingers ; and (2) pavuccati, it is
announced ;

3rd. An m is inserted : ex. (1) lahum essati, he will go quickly
(2) idhamahu here they said ;

C 18 T

4th. A dy after the words samma^ well ; pnna, again ; bahu,
much ; manasa (the instr. sing, of mano = S. manas), with the mind ; etc. :
ex. (1) sammad attho, rightly the signification ; (2) punadeva, again even ;
(3) bahudeva, much even ;

5th. A t, in the expression ajjat agge, henceforward ;

6th. An n, before the word ajati, to come to pass : ex. its najatii
from this time forth (Ohilders) ;

7th. An r, before the words tVa, like, as ; just, even, .only ; ex.
nakkhattar§jar iva, as the king of the constellations.

In the words yatha, as, like ; and tatha, so, thus ; the final long a
is abbreviated : ex. tathar iva, even so ; yathar iva, just as.

IV. The MEETiNa or Niggdhita with other lettfrs.

58. NiggaMta^ m, when it meets a consonant, remains unchanged,
or is transformed into the nasal of the class to which the consonant belongs :
ex. (1) tam karoti or taA karoti, he did it ; (2) dhammafl care or dhammam
carOi that he may act agreeably to the law ; etc.

59. In the words sam^ with ; pu;;a, man ; the niggahUa is assimi-
lated to the following I : ex. (1) sallapo, conversation ; (2) pullifigo, the
masculine gender.

60. Before the vowel e, before A, and words commencing with y
(in this case, the y is assimilated), the niggahUa may be transformed into
the palatal nasal (ii) : ex. (1) tafL fieva that also, or evam etam, so this ; (2)
evan hi vo, for thus ye ; or evam hoti, it is thus or thus it is ; (3) sannogo
or sawyogo, union ; (4) yan fiad eva (yaw yad eva), whatsoever.

61. Before the vowels, the niggahUa becomes m : ex. tam ahaw
brQmi, I say that, or tam aham brumi. In the word sammatOj honoured,
the m is never subject to change, and in some cases, the m continues before
consonants ; ex. buddham saranam gacch^mi, I seek refuge with Buddha
R'dpasiddhi (53. 1, 4, 5).

62. Sometimes, the niggahUa is suppressed for the exigencies of
metre, or to facilitate the pronunciation: ex.

1st, before vowels, tas' aham (tasam ahaw) ; of them, I.

2Qd, before consonants, ariyasaccana (for ariyasaccanam) dassa-
nam, etam buddhana (buddhanam) sasanam, the announcement of sacred

truths is the doctrine of Buddha.

t w 1

After the dropping of niggahita, the vowel is lengthened : ex. (1)
saratto, (for samratto, S. samrakta), excited ; (2) sarago for samrago, S.
saiTaraga), anger.

63. A vowel immediately following niggahita may be dropped,
especially in the words iti^ thns ; im, as ; iddni^ now ; ast, thou ark ; api ;
etc. In this case, niggahita is transformed into the nasal of the class, to
which the consonant that follows it belongs : ex. (1) kin' ti (for kim iti),
what ? ; (2) idam 'pi (for idam api), this also.

If, instead of a single consonant, there is a collocation of conso-
nants, the first part of it is suppressed : ex. eva;^) 'sa (eva;^) assa), thus, to
or for this.

64. Sometimes a niggahita is added before a vowel or a conso-
nant, to facilitate pronunciation: ex. (I) cakkhuw udapadi, the eye has
revealed itself (Cf§ 45); (2) yavam (yava, S.yavat) ca idha bhikkhave, and
as many as are here, monks I

V, The Meeting of Vowels and Consonants.

65. The vowels, in their meeting with consonants, Ist, remain
unchanged, ex. bbd,sati va karoti va, he either speaks or acts ; 2nci, are
lengthened, ex, kamato jayati (for jayati) soke, sorrow is engendered by
passion ; 3rrf, are shortened : ex, bhovadi (for bhovadi) nama so hoti, yatha
yidam (for y atha^ idam) parakkamo or parakkamo. [He is called Arro-
gant, (see Childers^ Pdli Die, s. v. bhovadi) as he is striving].

The choice of lengthening or shortening vowels depends on metre. A
vowel is shortened when there is an insertion or the reduplication of a consonant.

66. In the middle of a word, before the suffixes hi (S. bbi, instr.
pL) and su (loc. pi.) the vowels of nounal stems may be lengthened : ex.
aggibhi or aggibhi, aggisu or aggisu.

In conjugation, the a of verbal stems of the 1^^ class is lengthened
before the suffixes m», ma ; ex. bhavami, bhavama.

67* Some words, such as eso (S, eshah) this ; so (S. sal^) he ; mano
(S manas) the mind ; a^o (S. ayas) iron ; tamo (S. tamas) darkness ; etc, at
pleasure, lose the case suffix before consonants (eso, even before vowels) : ex.
(1) eso dhammo or esa dhammo, this law ; (2) eso attho or esa attho, this
meaning ; (3) so muni or sa muni, that sage ; (4) ayopattam^ iron cup, or
(5) ayakapalla/^}; iron vessel*

[ 20 ]

VI, The Meeting of Consonants.

68. The redaplication of consonants, at the commencement and
in the middle of a word, is, in Pali, produced, in the majority of oases, by
the assimilation of the two consonants that directly follow each other,
(see § 21). It is probable that the reduplication was not indicated in litera-
ry compositions before the works of the grammarians. Sometimes, it serves
to mark the quantity of a syllable : ex. (1) akhato or akkhato (S. §.khyata),
recounted ; (2) tanhakhayo or tanhakkbayo (S. trishna, kshaya), the
extinction of passion.

69. In certain cases, the reduplication of consonants, in the
middle of a word, cannot be explained by comparison with . Sanskrit|
and it is necessary to regard it as a peculiarity of Pali i thus, the y is
reduplicated after the u in suyyati, it is heard.

The following are other instances of this abnormal reduplication :
(1) dvaram na ppatipassani yena gacchami suggatim (Jaty xxi, i, 7), I do
not see the portal by which I might enter into the good path ; (2) taw
annupucchi vedeho, (ibid), Vedeha questioned her ; (3) tarn annuyayum
bahavo, {ibid), many followed him.

70. Sometimes, entire syllables are rejected to facilitate pronun-
ciation; ex. in place of say am abhinfiaya sacchikatva, it is allowable to
say say{«m abhiuHa sacchikatva, having himself known and seen face to
face ; jambudipaw avekkhanto adda (for addasa) rajanaw {Jat, xx, i, 7),
looking towards Jambudipa, he perceived the king ; tasma aham posatham
palayami lobho mama?/i ma punar agamasi {Jdt, xiv, i; 7), I observe upo^
satha that cupidity may not return to me.

It is thus that certain words are formed such as poso, by the side
of purisa (S. purusha), a man ; bhante for bhaddanta or bhadanta (this
word perhaps comes from the S. bhadran te, be happy).

Metathesis of entire syllables in the middle of a word is also per-
mitted ; ex. ayirassa for ariyassa (S. aryasya,from ariya = S. ^rya), nobloi
holy ; etc.

VII. Declension.

71. In Pali, as in Sanskrit, stems are formed in two ways : 1st,
directly from the root, by means of primary suffices (kit = S. k{it),aDd

[ 21 ]

2nd, by means of secondary suffixes (taddhita) added to the stems. F&li
treats these two categories in the same manner as Sanskrit.

72. In Pali, there are two numbers, the Singular and the Plural ;
and seven cases (not counting the Vocative) : Nominative, Aoousativei
Instrumentive, Dative, Ablative, Genitive and Locative.

The Bailee Sing, has not preserved its peculiar suffix, except in
a small number of examples of stems in a. It is mostly identical with the
Qenitive for the two numbers.

The Instrumentive and Ablative are always identical in the plural*

In the Plural, the Nominative and Accusative are sometimes
confounded.

P. 18. The following is the table of case suffixes :

Sing. Nom. Pali s Sanskrit s. 1. Plur. Fdii yo Sanskrit as

yo as

hi bhia

naf;i bhyas

hi bhyas

Ace.

nm

Instr.

a

Dat.

ssa

Abl.

smfi

Gen.

ssa

Loc.

8mi7?i

}

a/>i

2.

a

3.

e

4.

as

5.
6.

1

7,

mm Srm

su su

I. Declension of Stems ending tcUh a Vowel. P. 62.

(i) Stems in a (a, short),

73. The declension of nouns in Pali, is divided, as in Sanskrit^
into stems ending xcith a toicelj and those icith a consonant,

74. In stems ending in ^, the suffix cf of the instr, sing, is
replaced by ina : ex. purisa + ina = purisena.

The use of the suffix aya for the dative singular is optional : ex.
hitaya, sukhaya, i. e. hita + aya = hitiiya ; sukha + aya = sukhS-ya.

75. The suffixes of the abl : and loc. sitig^ for all stems, appear
under two forms, smd and mhd ; smim and mhi (S. smat, smiw of iheprO'
nominal declension) respectively : ex. purisasma or purisamha, purasasmim
or purisamhi.

In stems in a, these cases are also formed by means of the suffix
d (S. at) for the abl^ and i (S. for the loc. : ex. purisa, purise. The suffix

p. 19.

[ 22 1

to of the abl. sing, is added to stems with a coioel : ex. purisatOi aggito,
hetato. Before this suffix a long vowel is shortened : ex. y^guto, jambuto,
eto.

76. The nom. plur. of stems in a is formed by the addition of
the suffix a: ex. purisa + a = purisa. In the neuter^ this case takes,
either the same suffix a, or the suffix ani : ex. rQpa + a = rupa^ or rQpa +
ani = rupani, images.

The ace. plur. of these same stems has for its suffix e (S, as ; Of. e
coming from as in the Magadhr of the Jainas, in the nom. sing.) : ex. purise.

77. The suffix of the all. and instr. plm\ has two forms : hi and
bhi : ex. purisehi and purisebhi. The a of the stem is changed into e
before these suffixes^ as well as before that of the loc. plur. : ex. purisesu.

Before the suffix nam of the gen. plur., the a of the stem is
lengthened . ex. purisanam.

Declension of purisa (S. purusha) Masc. a man.

Pdli.

Sanskrit

S. Nom.

puriso,

a man

purushah

Aoc.

purisam,

a man

purushafu

Voc.

purisa

man I

purusha

Instr.

purisena^

by a man

purushena

Dat and

purisassa^

D. to or for &

f D. purushaya
\ G. purushasya

Gen.

G. of a man

Abl.

purisa,

purisamhai

purisasma, purushat
from a man

Loc.

purise,

purisamhii

purisasmim, purushe
in a man

PI. Nom.

purisa

men

purushas

Ace.

purise

men

purushan

Voo.

he purisa

men !

purushah

Instr. and purisehi,

purisebhi,

I. by and Ab. f I. purushaih
^om men \ Ab. purushebhyah

Abl.

Dat and

purisanam,

D to or for &

\ G. purushan&m

Gen.

G. of men

Loc.

purisesu

in men

purusheshu

78. In like manner are declined : sura (8. sura), a deity ; asnra
(S. asura) a Titan; nara (S. nara), a man ; uraga(S.uraga), a snake; nftga . P. 63.

L^

[ 23 ]

(S. naga), a serpent ; yakkha (S. yaksha), a Yakkha ; kinnara (S. kinnara,
a Kinnara; manossa (S. manashya), a man; pis&oa (S, pi^aoa), a goblin ;
varaha (S. varaha), a boar ; Biha (S. si/ziha), a lion ; eto.

79. Bhadanta has several forms for the voc. sing : bhadanta or
bhadanta, bhaddanta and bhanto. These last two forms are also used for
the nom. plur.

80. (ii). There are no feminine sterna in a (short), in Pali,

(iii). Neuter stems present some peouliarities. In the nom,
sing.y they terminate with m and have two forms in the nom. and ace.
plur. : ex.

Sing. Nom. cittami thought Plur. Nom. oittsl or oittani

Voo. oitta Yoo. citta or oittani

Aoo. oitta//) [eto. like the Aoo. citte or oittani, [eto. like

Maso. Sing]. Maso. Plur.].

P. 20. (i7). Masculine stems in d {a, long).

81. The Riipasiddhi (143) II, 1| 33 ; mentions some examples of
these stems. Their deelension is almost like that of stems in a (short).

Deolension of sa (S. Qvan), a dog.

Sing. Nom. sa (S). qvA Plu:

Voo. he sa CvA

Aoo. sam ^vana//>

Instr. sena Cuna

Dat, sassa, saya Cune

Abl. sa, samha, sasmS ^unah

Gen. sassa ^unah

Loo. se, samhi, sasmi;/) qxmi

In like manner are declined : paooakkhadhamma (S. pratyaksha-'
dharma bhagavan, see Mahdcastu) he to whom the law is evident ; gandN
vadhanva (S. gandivadhanvan), a name of Arjuna (Cf. § 243).

(v). Feminine Stems in a. (a long).

82. In these stems the voc. sing, has a special form. It termi-
nates with e : ex. kafiiiQ. (S. kanye). It is neoessary to exoept ammS,
anna, amba^ (S. amba) mother, whioh affect two forms in the voc. sing. ; one

Nom. sa (S). ^vdnah

Voo. he sa

^vdnah

Aoo. se

^unah

Instr. sahi, sabhi

^vabhih

Dat. sanam

Qvabhyali

Abl. sahi, sabhi

Qvabhyali

Gen. sana/Ti

^und//»

Loo. sasu

(^vasu

[ 24 ]

P. 21.

in d identical with that of the nam : ex. amma, and another in a by the
abbreviation of the vowel : ex. amma.

83. In the loc. sing, these stems take the suffix dyam or dya : ex.
kaiiiiayaw; kauilaya (S. kanyayaw).

The instr,^ daL, abL, and ge7i, have dya for their suffix. The ace.
is formed by the addition of the suffix am through the influence of the
niggahitay m, (Cf. § 6. I^ote).

84. The Declension of kafiila (S. kanya), a young girl.

S. Nom.

kafina

(S). kanya

PI. kanua, kailfiaya (S). kanyah

Voo.

he kafiue

kanye

he „ „

»

Ace.

kafiria;;}

kanya??)

3> »

^>

Instr.

kauilaya

kanyaya

kafiuahi^ kaufiabhi

kanyabhi

Dat.

»

kanyayai

kafmanam

kanyabhyah

Abl.

V

kanyayah

kafifliihi, kaiiiiabhi

j>

Gen.

)9

»

kafifiana»i

kanyanam

Loo.

I kafifiayai

^ 1 kanyayam

kafifiasu

kany^su

In like manner are declined : saddha (S. ^raddhS.) faith ; medha,
(S. medhfi) intelligence ; pafma (S, prajna) wisdom ; cinta (S. ciuta) medi-
tation ; devata (S. devata) a deva ; tanha (S. trishna) lust; vina (S. vina)
a lute ; iccha (S. icclia) wish ; safiua (S. sangfia) sense ; etc.

(vi). Masculine stems in «. (/ short),

85. These stems have m for the suffix of the ace. sing : ex. aggim.
The notn, and ace, plur, terminate in ai/o or { (i. e. they have the suffix as
with the gtnia of the stemmal vowel e, or properly the suffix t) : ex. aggayo
or aggi. The voc, is like the no7n. : ex. aggi^ aggi, aggayo.

Note. In the Rupasiddhi (132) II, 1, 62, the voc, sing, of isi
(S. rishi) a sage^ is found to be tse. The following example of it is taken
from Jat xix> i, 2 :

Maggo saggassa lokassa yatha janasi tva9}» ise : the path of the
heavenly world as thou knowest, sage !

86. Declension of aggi (S. agni), Masc. fire.

S. N. & V. aggi I ^' '^ Y agne } ^^' ^SB^JO aggi aggiyo (S). agnayo

P. 64,

S.Aoo.
I.

D.

Ab.

G.
L.

aggina

[ 25 1
(S).agnim PL aggayo, aggI,aggiyo(S). agnln

f aggino 1
\ aggissa J

{aggina,
aggisma,
aggimh^

f aggino 1
\ aggissa J

f aggimhi, 1
I aggismim J

}

agnina

agnaye

agneh
agneh

agnau

faggihi aggibhi
(aggihi, aggibhi

agginam
aggihi, aggibhi

aggihi, aggibhi
agginam

{aggisu
aggisu

> agnibhih

agnibhyah

99

}

agninam
agnishu. P. 65.

P. 23,

In like manner are declined : joti (8. jyotisS) light ; mutthi (S.
mtishti) the fist ; kuoohi (S. kukshi) the belly ; isi (S. rishi) a recluse ; mani
<S. muni) a sage ; mani (S. mani) a gem ; giri (S. giri) a mountain ; ravi
<S. ravi) the sun ; etc.

(vii). Stems masc. in { {i long).

87. Pali gramarians arrange two kinds of stems under this cate-
gory, (a) Sanskrit stems in in : ex. dand! (S. dandin), a man armed mth a
^tick, a mendicant} whose declension presents the following peculiarities ; in
the voc, sing, the long vowel is shortened : ex. bho dandi ! the ace. sinff,^ the
nom. and voc. plur.y and the loc. sing, have two forms respectively : 1^^,
dandim ; dandi; and dandismim, dandimhi; as in the declension of stems
in i (aggi) ; 2n(/, dandinam ; dandino ; dandini; following the analogy of
stems in in. (b) stems in ii ex^ g&mani (S. graman!)« a chief ; senani (S.
senani), a general; sudhi (S. sudhi), superior intelligence; which are
declined like dandi, save in the loc. sing, which does not possess the form
im., as in dandini : ex* r

Sing. Nom. gaman! Plur. Nom. g§,mani, gamanino

Ace. gamaninam Acc« ,, , ^y

„ gamanim, etc. etc.

The Declension of dandi (S. dandin) Masc. a mendicant.

dandi (S). dandi PI. N. dandi, dandino (S). dandinah

dandi dandin Y. „ , ^ ^i

fdandinaw \ ^o„^;„a^ A« t

\ dandiw

S.N.
V.

Ac.

}

9i

P. 66.

If

C 26 ]

Inst, dandina

dandina

i dandina 1

Ab. •< dandisma >dandinah

t dandimha J

p fdandino \

^ tdandissa J '»

I dandini 1

L. < dandismim > dandini

( dandimhi j

■^"'tdandibhi J
D. daDdmam

., fdandihi 1
^^' \dandibhi /

G. dandlnam
L. dandisu

dandibhih

dan^ibhyah

99

dandin&m

dandishu

Note. Stems in in also form the nam. plur. in po (S. y + as) :
ex. siha ca vyaggha oa atho 'pi dipiyo (Jot. ziv. i, 27), the lions, the
tigers, and even the elephants.

(viii). Feminine Stems in i, I (i short and i long).

88. Stems in i have the suffix m in the ace. sing : ex. rattim ;
the suffix yd in the instr,^ dat., abL, and gen, sing: ex. rattiya; the suffixes
yam, yd, and o in the loc, sing.

Declension of ratti (S. ratri) night.

PI. ratti> rattiyo (S)« rStrayah

S. Nom. ratti

Voo. „

Ace. rattif^

Inst, rattiya

Dat.

Abl.
Gen.

P. 24.

(S) ratrih
ratre
ratrim
ratrya

{ratraye |
ratryai )

>» 9 99

f rattiyaw, rat-"!

I tyam, or ra- | fratryam

99

j>

j>

ratti, rattiyo
rattihii rattibhi

rattinam

rattihi, rattibhi
rattlnam

ratrih
ratribhih

m

ratribhyah

99

ratrlnam

Loo. { tyam; rattim; y -{

ra-ll
L tya ; ratto. J

I rattiya, ra- j (.ratrau

rattisu, rattisu ratrishu

89. In stems in /, the aec. sing, takes the suffix yam (S. y + F- 67,
am) : ex. itthiyam, itthim.

.25.

L' 27 r

Declension of itthf, (S. Btri)Fem. a woman.
S. K. itthi (S).8trL Fl. itthi, itthiyo (S). striyah

V. itthi

^ f itthiyaw
. \ itthim

I. itthiya

D.

Ab.

G.

^' { itthlyam |

99

striyam
strim

striy^

fitriyai

Btriyaih

Btriyam

}

i> f

}9

W 9 V

itthihi, itthlbhi
itthinam
itthihi, itthlbhi
itthfnam

itthisu

jj or strih

siribhih
stribbyah

99

etrinam
Btrishu.

Note. For the word mahesi, a qneen, we find a gen. sing, in no ;
ex. mahesino laddho me ayasatho {JcU.iai, i, 9), I have received a queen's
residence.

90. Declension of nadi^ (S. nadi) Fem^ a river.
S. N. nadi. (S). nad! PL nadiyo, najjo^ nadi (S). nadyah

V. nadi

nadi
nadim

n 9 }} f
;» J 19 9

T ( nadiya )
^' t najja j

nadya

nadihi, nadibhi

Ab. „
G. „

nadyai
nadyah

nadlnam
nadihi, nadibhi
nadlnam

n

99

99

nadfh

nadfbhih
nadlbhyah

9t

L. ■( ""^.^y*"" I nadyam nadisu
( najjafn J -^

nadin&m
nadlsha

(ix). Neuter stems in i and ^. (t short and % long).

91. Neuter stems in i are declined like those of the masoulinei
and only differ from them in the nom^ voCy and ace, pi, whose sufiSx is ini;
ex. atthini (S. asthini) from atthi, a bone. But these can l&e equally
formed according to the analogy of masculine stems : ex. atthi.

Stems (neuter) in i are declined like those of the masculine, but
present, in the nom, voc, and accplur.^ the same peculiarity as above, and
have the nom. and voc. sing, in i short : ex. sukhakari (S* Bukhakarin, stem
in in)f (what does good) a benefaction*

P, 68,

P, 26,

I 28 ]
93. Deoleaeion of sakhi, (S. eakhi) Maso. a friend.

8. N. sakba

I

V.-< sakhl, sakhi V
(.sakhe )

{sakham
sakharam
sakbara/^

(S). aakha Fl. sakhano
sakhe

(S). sakhayah

flakhayam

I. Bakhina

•pv fsakhino
' ( sakfaissa

A* sakhina

1^ fsakhino
* ( sakhissa

L. sakhe

}
}

fiakhya

eakhye
fiakhyuh

sakhyau

{sakhayo
sakhino

{sakhano
(sakhi
Childera)

C sakhebi
2 sakhebhi
I sakharehi
(.sakbarebhi

{sakhinar/»
sakharanam

like the Inst.

{sakbinam
sakharanam

j sakhesu
\sakbaresa

99

fiakhin

}

8akhibhili
sakhibhyah

sakhiD&m
sakhisha

(x). Masculine stems in u and 4 (u short and u long).

93. In the aco. sing., these stems have the sufiix m. The nom.
and ac€. plur, are formed in several ways.

Ist, the vowel of the stem is lengthened : ex. bhikkhii, monks ;

2nd, the vowel of the stem is strengthened and the suffix o is
added to it : ex. bhikkhavo, (by strengthening is meant changing u into av) ;

3rd, the stem vowel is unchanged and takes the suffix yo (S. y +
as) in the words hetui a cause ; jantu, a creature ; ex. hetavo, hetuyo ; jan-
tavo, jantuyo ;

4th, it takes the suffix no (S. n + as) in the word janta : ez«
jantuno {MHpasiddhi (157) ii, i, 65).

5th, the voc, pi. is formed by the suffix e or o, which is added to
the strengthened vowel of the stem : ex. bhikkhave, bhikkhavo, or rather,
it is like the nom. bhikkhQ.

Declension of bhikkhu (5. bhikshu) masc. a mendicant feiar.

& N. bhikku (S). bhikshuh PI. bhikkhu, bhikkhavo (S). bhikshavah
V. .• bhiksho he » , „ , bhikkhave.

P. 69.

II

9}

V

?. 27. D.

I. bbikkhuna
f bhikkhuno

t 29 5

S. AO. bhikkbuw (S). bhikshu'm PL bhikkhQ, bhikkhavo (S). bhikshQn

bbikshQna

m

Ibhikkhussa } ttikshave

{bbikkhuna
bbikkbusma
bbikkhumha

Q f bhikkhuno
* I bhikkbussa

bhikkhubi, bhikkhubhi
bhikkhunaw «.

bhikshubhih
bhikshubhyah

bhikkhuhi, bhikkhGbhi

bhikkhunam

s)

{bhikkhusmiw 1 ri m i
bhikkhumhi I ^^'^^^^^"'^

f bhikkbtisu

V

bhikshuna;n
bhikshushu

\ bhikkhusu J

94. Stems in zi are distinguished by their manner of forming the
fwm, vo€, and acc.pl: e. g. abhibhu (S. Nom. Sing, abhibbuh) a conqueror,
makes in the nom. and ace, pi. abhibhu ; the wc, sing, is abhibhu : the suffix
e is not admitted in the plural vocative.

The words sahabhii, one who is enduring ; sabbafiiiQ (S. sarvajiia)
one who is omniscient ; have a form in no in the nom, and ace. 2^1 : ex.
sahabhuno, but also, forms in 4 and ?^vo : sahabhu, sahabhuvo. Sabbanfiu,
however, has only the two forms sabbannQ and sabbaMuno.

(xi). Feminine stems in u and ti. (w short and u long).

95. Feminine stems in u are declined like ratti.
Declension of piyaAgu, (S. priyaftgu) Fem. panick seed.

S.N.piyaftgu (S). priyaAgu PLpiyaftguyo piyaftgu (S), priyaftgavah

Ac. piyaftgum
I.

»

P. 28. D. piyafiguya

Ab.
G.
L.

>•

»

»

priyafigo

priyaftguw

priyaftgva

I pnyaftgave \
\ priyaAgvai J

f priyaftgvah
\ priyaftgoh

do , do '^
( priyaAgva/n \

lU j

V

)i

99

i9

J>

piyaftgQhi, piyaftgQbhi
piyaAgunam

piyaftgahi, piyaAgfibhi
piyaAgdnam piyaftguyam
piyafigCisu, piyafigusn

priyanguh P 70.
priyaftgubhih

priyafigubhyah

91

priyangunam
priyaAgushu

I priyaliga

In like manner are declined : dhatu (S. dhatu) an element ; daddu
(S. dadru), a kind of cutaneous eruption, ringworm ; kandu (S. kandu) the
itch; kacchu (S. kacchu) the scab; rajju (8. rajju)arope; kaneru (S.
ka^eru) an elephant ; etc.

[ 30 ]

96. Feminine stems in 4 are deolined like itthi : ex. jambQ (S
jambQ), the rose-apple tree^ Eugenia Jambu,

Sing. Nom. jambtl Plur. Nom. jambQ, jambuyo

Voc.jambu Voo* „ „

. Ace. jambum, eto. Aoo. y^ „ » eto.

In like manner are deolined: vadhQ (S. vadho) a bride, a
daughter-in-law ; sarabhQ (S. ^arabhu) reed-born (epithetical) ; sutanG (S.
ButanQ^m ; sutanvi, f) a beautiful body ; oamQ (S. oamQ) an army ; etc.

(xii). Nbutee stems in u and ii. {u short and u long),

97. As an example of neuter stems in u, the Riipasiddhi (199)
II, 4, 7, gives the word ayu (S. ayus), age, which is deolined under two
stems, one in 8, as in Sanskrit, the other in u.

Declension of ayu. (S. ayus) Neut. life, age.
S. N. ayu (S) ayuh PL 5yu, ajQni (S). ayQmshi

Ac. ayuw „ „ , „ „

^^ } ayuna, ayusa ayusha ayQhi, ayQbhi {g^ylh

G.clfayuno . Syushah ) avQnam I ayu^ham

D. (ayussa ayushe j ^ \ayurbhyah

L. ayusmim, ayumhi ayushau ayQsu ayushu

F« 29* In like manner are declined .* cakkhu (S. cakshus) the eye ; vasu

(S. vasu) wealth ; dhanu (S. dhanus) a bow ;daru (8. daru) wood ; madhu
(8. madhu) honey ; vatthu (8. vastu) substance, a story ; matthu (8. mastu)
whey ; assu (S. a^ru) a tear ; etc.

98. Neuter stems in 4^ such as gotrabhu, a thing that is in a
fit state for sanctification^ are declined like the masculine abhibhQ, with ]
the peculiarities which are noted in the following table :

Declension of gotrabho cittam Neut. a heart fit to be sanctified.

Sing. Nom. gotrabhu oittaw PI. N. gotrabhQ, gotrabhQni, citta or oittani

Voc. „ „ Voc, ,, , „ do, do

Ace. gotrabhuw ,, Aoo. „ , i, dtte, do

Instr. gotrabhuna, etc*

[ 31 ]

Masculine stems ik o.

99. Declension of go (S. go) Maso. a bull, [also Fern, a oow, see
Childers' P. JDic.-].

PI. gavo gSvo,

S. N. go
V. go

(S). gauh

>i

(S). gavah

{gavam
g^vam
gavum

gam

V y ii

J fgavena 1

Igavena J »

p. 30. D.(8ft^'««'^ I gave

(gavassa J ®

■^

fgava
gava

j gavamha |
I gavasma j
t gavasma J

goh

C^f gavassa 1 ^

I gavassa J ^ •

\gobni

{gavam
gnnnam
gonam

fgohi
\gobhi

{gavam
gunnam
gonam

}

gab

gobhih.

gobhyah

}

gobhyah

gavSm

lJ

gavi

( gaveflu
< g^vesu
(gosu

gosa

' gave

gave

gavamhi

g9,vamhi

gavasmim
^gavasmimj

(Note. Probably the long vowel forms as gdvanij gdvena, etc. bxq feminine) E. T.

Stems in w (S. ri). P. 72.

100. The words satthu (S. c^astri), a teacher ; pitu (S. pitri)^ a
father ; matu (S. matri), a mother ; bhatu (S. bhratri), a brother ; dhitu
(S. duhitri), a daughter ; kattu (S. karfri), a doer ; etc., have the nom. eing.
in d : ex. sattha. In the roc, the d is shortened at will : ex» sattha or
sattha. These steins are declined thus :

Declension of sattha (S. ^astri) Masc. a teacher.

S. N. sattha (S). ?asta PL sattharo (S). ^astarah

'.31.

P. 32.

S. Ao. sattharam

J J satthara
' \ satthuna

{satthussa
satthuno
satthu

Ab. satthara

{satthussa
satthuno
satthu

L. satthari

t 32 :i

(S). ^astaraw PI. sattharo

f sattarehi

(S). ^astna

^^'*^^ {sSbhi ) ^astribhih

> ^astribyahh

> ^Sstribhyah

}

^astre

^astuh

gastuh
^astari

fsattharanam
\ satthana;n

f sattharehi
I sattharebhi

{sattharana?/)
satthanam

sattharesu

QastrinSm
Qastrishu

In like manner are declined : netu (S. netri), a guide ; sotu
(S. Qrotri), a hearer; fiatu (S. jnatri), one who knows ; jetu (S. jetri), a
conqueror ; ohettu (S. chettri), one who cuts ; bhettu (8..bhettri), one who
breaks ; datu (S. datri), a giver; dhatu (S. dhatri), a sovereign, etc.

101. The words pitu and those [the four] which follow are
distinguished from the satthu class, 1st, by the nom, plur. : ex. pitaro ; 2ndy
by the new forms of the instr, and obL plur. : ex; pituhi, pitubhi ; Zrd, by
the gen. and dat^ plur. : ex. pituna/w, pitunnam ; 4^A, by the loc, plur.
pitQsu.

The word kattu (S. kartri) also; makes a form in usu, katttisu> in
the loc. plur.

102. Before the all. suflSx tOy (Cf. §. 75. para. 2) the vowel u of
the stem is changed into i in these words : ex. pitito, matito, etc. This
change even takes place in combination : ex. pitipakkho, matipakkho.

103. The following peculiarities are to be noted in the declen-
sion of matu (S. matri).

Declension of matu (S. matri), Fem. a mother.
S. N. mata (S). mata PL mataro (S). matarah

V. „

matah

•

Ao. mataram

mataram

J r matara 1
■"•• \ matya )

matra

J. Tmatu T
( matuya j

matre

9>

J)

Ab.

( matara
\' matya

}

matul^

{matarehi, matarebhi )
matuhi, matQbhi J

{mataranam, matanam )
matuuaw j

r matarehi, matarebhi \
(matuhi) matdbhi J

matrih

• •

matribhih

matribhyal^

%t

l S8 3

33.

0.1"!;° - I matuh f mataranam, matanaml ajatrfnam

(matuya J ( matunam J

L. matari matari mataresu, matasu matrishu

II. Declension of Stems ending with a Consonant.

104. In Pali, the declension of these stems exists only in a few
instances. By the side of ancient forms proceeding from stems ending
with a consonant^ there appear to be forms coming from stems ending
with a vowel.

(i) Stems in o (S. as).

105. The words mano (S. manas) mind ; vaco (S. vacas), dis-
course ; vayo (S. vayas), age ; tapo (S. tapas), heat ; ceto (S. cetas), thought ;
tamo (S. tamas), obscurity; yaso (S. ya^as), glory ; ayo (S. ayas), iron ;
payo (S. payas), a beverage ; siro (S. ^iras), the head ; uro (S. uras), the
breast ; aho (S. ahan), a day ; are declined in the following manner :

Declension of mano (S, manas) Neut. mind.

S. N. mano

(8).

manah

•

PL mana

(S).

manaT/jsi

V. mana

»

99

99

Ac. manafTi

99

mane

>9

J f manasa
* ( manena

}

manasa

f manehi
\ manebhi

}

manobhih

•

jv J manaso
* X manasso

}

manase

mananam

manobhyt

( mana
Ab.< manasma
( manamba

}

manasah

■

/manehi
( manebhi

}

99

p J manaso
' \ manassa

}

tj

mananam

manasa /n

{ manasi, mane
L. < manasmim
(^manamhi

i

manasi

manesu

manahsu

•

106. For the declension of stems in in, see above § 87.

(ii) Stems in an,

107. The words brahma (8. brahman), masc. a Brahma angel^ a
Buddha; raja (S. rajan), masc. a king; atta (S. atman), masc. the soul;
etc., follow their several stems in their respective declensions.

P. 74.

C 8* ]

P.34.

P. 35.

108. Declension of brahma (S. brahman) Masc. a Baddha.
S. N. brahma (S). brahma PI. brahmano, (S). brahmanah P. 71

V. brahme brahman

f brahmanam

>9

Ac.

}

\ brahmaiT)

I. brahmuna

pv rbrahmuno )
* \ brahmassa J

Ab. brahmuna
( brahmuno

brahmanavi
brahmana
brahmane

99

f brahmehi, 1
i i

' \ brahmassa
L. brahmani

}

}

\ brahmebhi

f brahmanain, I
\ brahmQnam J

11 , f brahmehi, }

brahmjmah {brahmebhi /

{brahmanam,
brahmanam

brahmani brahmesu

109. Declension of raja (S. rajan) Masc. a king.

S. N. raja (S). raja PI rajano

V. raja, raja

Ac. rajanam, rajam

I. raljena, rafiti^

D. rajiuo^ rafifio

Ab. rajato, rafifi^

G. rajino, raiifio
L. rajini, rafifle

brahmanah

brahmabhih

brahmabhyah

brahmanam
brahmasu

(S.)- rdjanah

rajan
rajanam

rajfla
rajfie
r&jfiah

99

>»

irajahi, rajQbhi \
rajehi, r^jebhi J

{rajQnam I

rajanam, rafiiiain |

{rajQhi, rajQbhi I
rajehi, rajebhi J

rajfiah
rajabhih

rfgabhyah

i>

( rajQnam 1

'' I rajanam, rafifiam |

rajfii, rajani rajCisu^ rajesu,

110. Declension of atta (S. atman), Masc. the soul.

r^tiaiTi
rajasu

S. N, atta

V.

( atta

(atta

^^ jattanam
( attam

I.

( attana

\ attena
D. attano

Ab. attana

0. attano
L. aitani

}
}
}

(S). atma

PI. attano

(S). atmanah

atman

atmanam

atmana
atmane
atmanah

atmani

99

91

99

J attehi
( attebhi

attanam

( attehi
( attebhi

attanam

attesu

}
}

atmanah -

atmabhih
atmabhj^a^

atmanam
atmasQ

.36.

t 35 3

(iii) Stems in vat, mat,

111. These stems have d for the suffix of the nom* sing. : ex.
gunava (8- gupavan) from gunavat (8. gunavat), virtuous. The stem
himavat (S. himavat) cold, snowy^ the Himalayas ; takes the double form
himavanto or himavsl in the nom. sing.

112. The voc. sing, is formed in three ways : Ist, gnnavam ; 2ndy
gunava ; 3rd, gui^ava. In other cases they regularly follow their several
stems ; ex. :

Stem vat. Stem a.

Declension of gunavai m. (gunavat!, gunavanti, / ; gunavantam,
w.) virtuous.

S.N. gunava (S). ganavan PI { f^ J^^J^f^' } (S). gnnavantah

}

gunavantam
> gunavata

* \ gnnavam
Ac. gunavantam

»>

r (gunavata
' ( ganavantena

gunavante

{gunavantehiy
gunavantebhi

Tx f gnnavato
' \ gunavantassa

{o^unavata
gunavantasma
gupavantamha

|-j f gunavato
' ( gunavantassa

> gui^avate
>gunavatah

} ..

}

( gunavatam 1
\ gunavantanam J

f gunavantehi 1
\ gunavantebhi J

{gunavatamy )
gunavantanam /

gunavatah
gu^avadbhih

gunavadbhyah P. 77*

yy

gunavatam

1^ gunavati
gunavante
gunavantasmim
gunavantamhi

gunavantestt

gunavatsu

[The feminine is declined like itthf].

113. The neuter stems have the forms gunavati (8. gunavat) in
the nom, sing ; gunavanta or gunavantani (8. gunavanti), in the nom. plur.

The other eases are like those of masculine stems.

114. The words satima (8. smritimat) of retentive memory,
reflecting ; bandhuma (8. bandhumat) having relatives ; follow two stems
in the ace, sing. : 1st, satimam ; 2nd9 satimantam ; and three in the gen.
sing. ; 1st) satimassa ; 2nd} satimato ; 3rd> saiimautassa.

[ 36 ]

?• 37. 115. In like manner are declined : kulava (S. kulavat) belonginpr

to a high family; phalava(S. phalavat) bearing fruit ; yasava (S. ya^asvat)
famous ; dhanava (S. dfaanavat) wealthy ; sutava (S. Qrutavat) ; learned
in religious literature ; bhagava (S. bhagavat) worshipful ; himavS (S.
himavat), cold, snowy; balava (S. balavat) strong; sTlava (S. gilavat)
moral, virfcaous ;pafifiava (S. prajfiavat) wise ;dhitima(S. dhritimat) cour-
ageous ; gatima (S. gatimat) having the power of motion ; matima (S.
matimat) sensible, wise ;jutima (S. dyutimat) brilliant; sirima (S. ^rfmat)
fortunate, prosperous ; hirima (S. hrimat) modest ; etc.

(iv) Stems in at.
116. Stems in at are distinguished from the preceding by the
formation of the nom. sing.j which is in aw, and are declined thus :

Declension of gacchaw, gacchanto, m- (gacchati, gacchanti, /;
gacoham and gacchanta;?}, n.) going.

^ N fgaccham
t gacchanto

Y f gaccham,
\ g^ccha, gaccha

Ac. gacchantaTTi

T f gacchata,
\ gaccliantena

yv { gacchato,
' ( gacchantassa

}(8).g«»k.. P1.{SJ«*«°^ } (S). g«ob..t.h p.
}

gacchanta;n
gacchata;n

> gacchata

> gacchate

Ab.^ gacchantasma, >

I }

gacchatah

gacchante

{gacchantehi,
gacchantebhi

{gacchatam,
gacchantanam

{gacchantehi,
gacchantebhi

gacchatah
gacchadbhih

{ gacchata w,
gacchantanam

}

> gacchadbhyah

} -

> gacchatam

gacchati gacchantesu

gacchatsu

f gacchata
< gacchantj
( gacchantamha

p /gacchato, 1

' \ gacchantassa J

! gacchati,
gacchante
gacchantasmim
gacchantamhi

In like manner are declined : maha>n (S. mahat) mahatly

mahanti, f ; mahantam, n ; great ; caram (S. carat) walking ; tittham (S*

tishthat) standing; dadam (S. dadat) giving; bhufijaw (S. bhufijat)

eating ; etc.

In the neuter stems the nom, sing, has the following form gaccham
(S. gacchat) ; the nom, phr, gacchanta or gacchantani (S. gacchanti).

[ 87 ]

•

_ •

'p

"*^ if

j2

•V

a d

%

!^

03 e«

> >
1 1

^•^

M

o

1 ■

«\

OQ

P

o

^

u

o

>

"^ "Pi*

• 0^

•

-*a ^ta

9

•

§

a d

SK

1-3

^

e8 08

S

1 1

08

>

1

•\

S

•* .A

es

O lA

>

^

.j-> -M

S

eo

p a

a-
P.

^

08 08

;^

S-T

•♦J
OS

-♦a
c8

P

id8

>

08

a-

p

9

^

08 c3
P* >
P ^

® 2

• ««

• •«

P P

03 o8

08

.a
I

>

•3

O

J4

P

i I I

-M

§

►

p

08

s

p

•C3 5

•^M ■ 08

S S -S p

^ ^ 08 08

hi

O

P

p

OS

08

P

OS

s

•fa
P
08
>

09 P

08 08

-♦J -fa

P P

03 08

> >

J4

s

•^

s

OQ

J3

a

08

08

•+-»

^

P

P

03

08

>

►

I I II

P3
o

«*M QQ

P

o

CO

p

'Si
S

o
O

•** fnT
08 •M

22 ^
P* >>

P ^

be

P
08

•43
03

08 03 R o8
> > > >

I t I I I I

-^ P
c8 08

TT

les

oS

OS
>

^ . &)

\^

teS o8

TT

s

08

P

08

P « !fi 5

p ^ p 5S p. c-S'^"^

P^P-PPC^-tiP
o8flSo8oSc8fl8o8rtfl8

I I I I I I I ^ 1 I

^ A

C 38 ]

• ml

o

a

§

*-;

I

eS

I

9

h3
PS

08

o
el

O

o

m

a
I

P
o

CQ

; C3

^ 9

08 08

I I

00

O

o8 ' cs

1 I

ic3
08

d

08

J

S d

08 08

I I

II— I

d

08

•:3

08

03 O

'S d

O C8

:3 c8

-; p

s «

&

08

d.

■*^

d

08'

d

CQ

d

eS

I 1 I

<-^ p

d

08

08 cS ? f

Mil

■2

d

A

d

08

p4

I ^

ic8 '5

08

d

eS

OQ
00

m d

CO

08

eS c8

•M

■4J

•4J .*J

d

d

d d

c3

08

08 08

I I I I

• f4

d

08

1

>* -rS

IS d'ls fl

rt CS ^ c$

ice >^

•43 d
08 c8

f I I I I I I I

g J

08 P^

'■^ d

08 08

1 I

08

d

o

08

u
08

00

CO

IS

d

OS
CO

(A

W

I

icQ

eS

CO
OQ

08

d

08

Q ^

I 1

08

1

^ d

eS c8

? 1

o

03

1

I I

d d

c3 08

Sizi >

« ft

[ 39 ]

P,39.

117. Bhavanta (S. bha vat) . Lord, sir, appropriates ttr^5 forms
in the nom and voc. plur.f bhavanto (S. bhavantah), bhavanta, bhonto.

In the \'0€. sing., we find the following variations : bho, bhavante,
bhonto, bhonta (S. bhavan).

The instr. and gen, sing, are formed thus :

S. I. bhavantena, bhavata, bhota (S. bhavata),
G. bhavantassa, bhavato, bhoto (S. bhavatah).

The ace, plur. has two forms : bhavante, bhonte (S. bhavatah).

118. Santa (S. sat) being, good, wise ; preserves the ancient
form sabhhi (S. sabbhih) in th6 instr, and abl, plur, arising from a stem
ending with a consonant : ex. sabbhir eva samasetha, sabbhi kubetha san-
thavaw, [associate with the good, become intimate with them. E, T."} {Jdt*
XX. i, 5) ; but it also exhibits the form sautehi.

(v). 119. Declension of puma (S. puwas), Masc. a male.

S. N. puma
V. pumaw
Ac

j>

(S). puman PI. pumano (S). pumawisah

puman

y}

99

97

pumsah

{pumana
puinuna
pumena

■p. ( pumuno
' ( pumassa

Ab. pumuna

p f pumuno
* ( pumassa

{pumane, pume \
pumasnnV/4 >

pumamhi f

pumsa

pumse

pu;?esah.

»

pumsi

{pumanehi \
pumanebhi J

pumbhih

pumanaTTi > pumbhjah

{

{pumanehi
pumanebhi

pumanam

{pumasn
pumesu

}

j>

}

'pnmsam

pumsa

120. The words kamraa (S. karman), business; nama (S. naman),
a name; thama (S. sthaman), force; from their ff en, and abl. sing, alike.
They have also the following forms in the abl., kamma, kammasmii, kam-

onamha. The word thama makes thamina^ thamena, tbamasa, in the instr.
sing.

P. 79.

p. 40. (vi).

S. N. yuva

' J yuvan&
tyuvana

Ac /y^vam
\ yuvanam

{yuvana
yuvanena
yuvena

( yuvassa

{yuvana
yuvanasma
yuv^namha

fi fyuvanassa
\ yuvassa

Tyuve
yuvasmiw
J J yuvamhi
* I yuvane
I yuvanasmiw
(^yuvanamhi

[ 40 ]

121. The declension oiyma (S. yuvan), young, a youth.
(S).yuva PI. yuvauo, yuvana (S). yuvanah

yuvan

yuvanaw

ytlna

ytine

ytinah

«

yuvan^

yuve, yuvane

91

yGnah

fyuvehi yuvebhi ) y^vabhih

( yuvanehi, yuvanebm ) ^

yuvtoam^ yuv3,nanafn yuvabhyah

f yuvehi, yuvebhi 1

\ yuvanehi, yuvanebhi J ^

. yuvanam, yuvananam yQnani

P. 80

yQni

{yuvesu
yuvanesu
yuvasu

yuvasik

[Feminine yuvati, a maiden, (Childers)'],
YIII. Degrees of Comparison.

122. The comparative is formed by means of the suffixes :
1st, iara (S. tara) ; 2nd, iya (S. lyas) ;

the superlative by means of the suffixes}:

Ist, tama (S. tama) : 2nd, ittha (8. ishtha); 3rd, issika: ex.

Pos. Masc. papo, Fem. papa, Neut. papam (S. papah), criminaL

Com.

„ papataro, „ papatara, „ papataram (S. papatara) ;

„ papiyo, „ papiya, „ papiyaw (S.papiyas),

„ papatamo; „ papatama ; ,, papatamam ; (S. papatama) ;

„ papittho ; „ papittha ; „ papittham; (S. papishtba) ;

„ papissiko; „ papissika; j, papissikam.
123. In order to make a statement more forcible, the suffix of
the comparative may be added to thftt of the superlatire : ex. papitthataro
(S. papishthatarah).

or

Sup.
or
or

P. 81.

[ 41 ]

124. Some adjectives form their comparative and superlative
from new stems : ex.

Positive.
Tuddha (S. vriddha), old ;

Comparative. Superlative,

jeyyo (S. jyayas); jettho (S.jyeshtha).

P. 42 .pasattha (S. pra^asya), praised ; { ;; ^^^^^ g ^^^^ ^J^ . ^^^^^^^ f^ (jreshtha).

antika (S. antika), near ; nediyo (S. nedlyas) ; nedittho (S. nedishtha).

balha (S. vadha), excessive ; sadhiyo (S. sadhiyas ; sadhittho (S. sadhishtha).

appa (S. alpa), little ; j j^ . ^g ^ kanittho (S. kanishtha ).

yuva (S. yuvan), young ) • ^ •^ * • • ^

125. The stems in vat (S. vat), mat (S. mat), vi (S. vin) reject
these suffixes before those of the comparative, and superlative : ex.

Positive, Comparative. Superlative.

gunava (S. gunavan ), virtuous ; guniyo (S. guniyas ) ; gunittho (S. gunishtha ).
satima (S. smritiman)^ mindful ; satiyo (S. smritiyas) ; satittho (S. smritishtha).
m6dhavi(S. medhavin), intelligent ; medbiyo (S. medhiyas); medhittho (S. medhishtha).

S. N. aham

Ac

P. 43.

f ma;73mam
■ \ mawt

I. maya

iamham
mania
mayhaw
mam am

Ah. maya

!amham*
mama
mayham
mamam

L. mayi

IX. Pbonouns.

126. Personal Pronouns.

Ist Person.

Stem amha (S. asmad).

Declension of aham, I.

(S). aham PI. amhe, mayam (S). vayaw

V „ y amhakam asman, nah

may^ amhehi, amhebhi asmabhih

P. 82

mam
ma

f mahyam 1
I me j

{ amham '\
-? amhakam >
(^asmakam J

asmabhyam, nah

mat

amhehi, amhebhi

asmat

f mama \
\me J

£ amham 1
< amhakam >
(^ asmakam J

> asm^kam, nah

mavi

amhesu

asmasu.

L 42 ]

127. 2nd Person.
Stem tumha (S. tvad).
Declension of tuvawi tvaw, Thou.
S. N. tuvam, tvam (S;. tvam PI. tumhe, (S). yQyaw

p. 44.

Ac -f " ' " i

• \ tavam, taw J

I. tvaya taya

-pw f tumhaw, 1

* ( tuyham, tava J

Ab. tvaya, taya

tvam. tva { t„p;',j5kam }

, , r tumhehi, •

*^*y^ i tuinhebhi I

, ,, , f tumham, )

tubhyam, te { tumhakam /

yushroan, vah

tvat

p ftumham, 1

I tuyham, tava
L. tvayi, tayi

r tumhehi,
\ tumhebhi

( tumham,
\ tumhakam

tumhesu

}
}

yushmabhih

yushmabhyaiTi, vah

yushmat

yushmakam, vah
yushmasu

P. 82

tava, te
tvayi

128. Ifo(S. nali)and vo (S. vah) are employed as the ace,, dat.,
and gen. plur. of the pronouns of the 1st and 2nd persons respectively,
provided, always, that the sentence does not begin with these words, and
that they are not preceded by ca, vd, eva. They are also used as the nom.
and instr. plur : ex. gamarw no gaccheyyama, we inay go to the village ;
gamam vo gaccheyyatha, you may go to the village.

Me and te are used as the inatr., dat,, and gen, sing, in accordance
with the same rules

129. 3rd Person. ;

Stem ta (S. tad),
sa,/. ; tam, nam, n. ; he, she, it ; this ; that.
Singular.

Fern, Neut,

sa (S). sa tarn, nam (S). tad

tarn, nam tarn, tarn, nam tam

taya, naya taya tena, nena tena

f tassaya, taya
. , ^ I tissaya, tissa . , ^

j^ (ta8sa,nas8a,l tasmai ^ nassaya, naya l^tasyai / t««8a, nassa, 1

'■**®* J tassa/nassa, | ^^^^^ ^

assa .J J,

Declension of so, m.

Ma%c.
N. so (8). sah

Ac. tarn, nam tarn

p.. 4c. I. tena, nena tena

tasmai P*

j^i

C 43 ]

Masc.

Fern.

Neut.

ftamha,
I namha,
&.b. { tasma,
I nasma^
(^asina

>'(S). tasmat

J

rtamh&,
I namha,
taja, naja (S). tasj&h'^ tasmai) *

I nasm^,

I

} (S) . tasmat

I

\ asina

J

n f tas8a,nassa,7 . ^

I tamhi, "^

I nambi |

L.-{ tasmiw,
I nasmi;/)
l^asmif/^

tasmin

Masc,

N. te, ne

Ac. te, ne

itehi,
tebhi
nebi,
nebbi

. 46. D. I *•'''""' I
( nesa/^i j

itebi, 1
tebbi f
neni, i
nebbi }

p f tesam, I
■ \ nesaw J

j^ ftesu, I
L nesu J

(S). te
tsin

taih

tass&ya, taya ^
tissaja, tissa |

^ nassaya, nd>ya V
tassa, nassa, j

[assd I

itassam, tayam
nassam,
nay am assam,
tissam

Plural,
Fem.
tayo, t^i na

^

f tassa, nassa, )
(assa j

tasya

i tamhi,
nambi
tasmim,
I nasmim
l^asmim

1'

tasmin

(S). tah

{tabi, ts^bhi
nabi, nabhi

}

"''J'* {SS } '»''''?'*{

»

{tabi, tSlbbi
nabi, n^bhi

}

tesbam
tesbn

tasam, n^sam
tasu, nasu

itebi,
nebbi

tesam,
nesam

itebi,
tebhi
nehi,
nebbi

f tesam,
\ nesam

f tesu,
( nesu

Neut,
t^ni^nani (S). tani

tani

»

t&sam
tasu

taih

I tebhyab P. 85.

tesbam
tesbn.

Demonstratiyb Pronouns.
130. Stem eta (S.etad).
Declension of esc, m. esa,/. etam, n. ; this, this one ; that.

Singular.
Masc. Fem. Neut.

N. eso (S). esbah esa (S). esha etam (S}.etad
Ac. etam etam etam etam etam etad

[ 44 ]

I.

The other cases

p. 47. D.

both in the sm*

gular and

Ab.

plural are declined

like so

G.

with e prefixed

L.

Fern.

etaya (S). etaya

f „ , etissaya, ) ^^ j
I etissa ; J

etaya etasyah

f „ , etissaya, 1
\ etissa ; J

( etaya, etayaw, j ^^
\ etissa//* ; J ^

a

NeuL

The o^A^r cases.

both in the singular
and

plural are declined

like torn

with ^ prefixed

m

Plural.
N. & Ac. etayo, eta (S). etah
I. & ^b. etahi, etabhi | ^b.Shyah

rD.
Ig.

etas am

D. i& G. etas am

Loo. etasu etasu

Note^ In like manner are declined anfia (S. anya) other, itara
(S. itara) other, difierent; in the masc, fem.j and neuL In the^^m. sing*
dat, and gen. they respectively make annissa, anfi^ya; itarissa, itaraya ; in
the loc, afifiissam, afifiayam ; itarissa/n itarayam.

Stem ima (S. idam).

131. Declension of ayam, m. ; ayam,/ ; idaw, imaw, n. ; this.

Singular.
Fern.

(S).iyam |!^^^»

I

Masc.
N. ayaw

Ac. imam

J fanena,
' \ imina

I imassa

{asma,
imasma
imamha

}
}

(S). ayam
imam

anena

ayam
imam
imaya

t

imam

NeuL

\ (S). idaw

imam

>i 9 9)

^

I

asmai

asmat

fassaya,

I assa

i. imissaya, ^

I imSya,

l^imissa

im&ya

. r anena,
^"''y* i imina

. fassa,
*^y*i (^ imassa

}
}

idam
anena

asaai

{asm&, *^
imasml^ S-
imamha j

aemSt

[ 45 ]

Masc.

C^-ISsa ICS)-"^'*

Fern,

Tassaya,
I assa

-^ imissaya,
I imaya,
l^imissa

Neut.

> (S). asyah I

assa,
imassa

}(8).

asya

imasmi;?}
imambi

Masc.
N, ime

Ac. ime

!ebi,
ebhi
imehi,
imebhi

Iesanam,
imesanam.
imesam

ebi,

asmim

asmia

Plural.
Fern,

(S). ime
imau

f imayoi
\ima

}(S).i

imab

Neut.
im^ni (B). im&ni

9)

>9

}9

••"^S' {£&

}

abhib

imani

I ebi,
jebbi

Iimebi,
imebbi

v

ebbib

«'v.h{!:sr'}

£ esanam,

abhyah } f'^r ,
•^ • J imesanam,

(^imesam

ebbyab

iehi,
ebbi
imehi,
imebbi

G.

^imesam
L. esu, imesu

J esaw
I iinesanam,

r imabi,
( imabhi

fimasanam,

}

f ebi,

}}

esbam { t"'-**"-''^ I
( imasam J

^sam

asu

ebbi
I imebi,
(^imebbi

iesanam,
esam
imesanam,
imesam

esu, imesn

)9

esbn imasu

Stem amu (S. adas).
132. Declension of asu, m, asu,/, adam, n. ; this, that.

Singular.

IMasc, Fern,

I. asu (S). asau asu (S). asau

Ae. amum amutn amum amOm

L amun& amuna amuyd amuyd

.M= } -- u^ }--

esbam

eshu

Neut.
adum (S). adam
^y y amufn „

amuna aman&

I amussa
\ adQSsa

■ }

amushmai

[ 46 ]

Ab.

MaBc.

f amusma.
( amnmha

}(S).

amnshmat

Fern, Neut.

amuya (S). amnshyah {j™!,! }(S).amu8h

r\ f amrissa, 1 i_

( amussa J

>»

{amussa,
adussa

}

L.

( amusmi;;}

( amnmbi

f amuyaw, 1 i. - f amusmiiw, 1

(S). ami
amtjn

N. amii

Ac, amu

jfaiptjbi, 1

I amubhi J

* famubi, 1

-^^- 1 amubhi /

amushmim < -^ ' > amushyam •< i .'

( amussaw J I amumbi

Plural.

Fern.

I (S).amuli

amusl
aniusli

NeuL

f amuyo,
( amu

{amu,
amQni

>j

)9

amibhih I*"*??!:.
( amubhi

amusauam
amusam

99

j amuhi,
\ amubhi

G

•{

amusanam
amasam

L. amusu

' > amisbam -J
amishu

amusauam
amusam

amusu

}

}
■}

?>

j>

»

-UI.-1, famuhi,
amubhih < .i/.
( amubhi

1

}

-I.U v f amusanawi, \

amubhyah < . ' >

•^ • ( amusam J

/ amuhi, 1

'* lamiibhi J

.V- f amusanam, )

amusham < . ' >

t amusam j

amushu amusu

(S) am(i

amfl
amft

aiii£it
amisl

133. The neuter has adum (S). adah) in the nom. sing. ; adnm
or amum (S). adah) in the ace. sing, ; amu, amuni (S. amuni) in the ace.
pluraL

Note, The sufBx ia may be added to the stem amu ifi express
scorn :

Masc, Masc.

S. N. amuko, or asuko ; this, that ; such a one, '^Pl. N. amuka or asaka,
Ac. amukam or asukam, etc Ac. amuke or asuke^ etc

The Relative Pronoun.
Stem ya (S. yad)

134. Declension of yo, m. ya, /. yam, n. ; who, which what;
he who ; whoever.

Masc. Fern.

S.Nyo (S).yali Pl. N.ye(S).ye S.N.ya (S). ya PI. N. yayo, ya (8). yak

Ac. yam yam Ac. ye yan etc. ) Ac. yam y&m Ac. yayo, ya y"v> •

'In the neuter, the nom. and ace. sing, become yam (S. yat), plumi
yaai (S. yani), etc. I'his stem is 4eelined like sabba ; see § 136, ^

[ 47 ]

The Interbogative Pkonoun.

Stem kim (S. kiw). '

135. Declension of ko, m. ka,/. kim n. ; who ? which? what P of
what sort ?

Masculine.

S.N. ko

(S).

kah

•

PI. N. ke

(S).

ke

Ac. kam

kam

Ac. ke

kan

I. kena

kena

I. kehi^kebhi

kaili

•

D. kassa, kissa

kasmai

D, kesam

kebhyah

Ab. kasma, kamha

kasmat

Ab. kehi, kebhi

»>

0. kassa, kissa

kasya

0. kesam

kesham

J f kasmim, kismim
' ( kamhi, kimhi

}

kasmin
Feminine

L. kesu

kesha

*

S. N. ka

(S).

ka

PI. N. kayo, ka

(S).

kah

■

•

Ac. ksLtn

kam

Ac. kayo, ka

kah

•

etc. like sabba ; see § 136.

Neuter,

S.N. kim

(S).

kim

PI. N. kani

(S).

kani

Ac. kirn

ka«n

Ac. kam

136.

etc. like the Masculine,
X. Pronominal Adjectives.

Declension of sabba (S. sarva)^ ftU.

Singular.

Ma^c,

Fern.

Nent.

N. sabbo

(S).

, sarvah

•

sabba

(S).

sarva

sabbam

(S)

. sarvam

V. sabba

sarva

sabbe

sarve

sabba

»

Ac. sabbam

sarvam

sabbam

sarvam

sabba//}

j>

I. sabbena

sarvena

sabbaya

sarvaya

sabbena

sarvena

D. sabbassa

sarTasmai

( sabbassa

j

sarvasyai

sabbassa

sarvasm

. 1 i sabbasma
* ( sabbamba

}

sarvasmat

sabbava

•

sarvasyah

r sabbasma
\ sabbamba

)

sarvasm

G. sabbassa

sarvasya

( sabbassa

}

M

sabbassa

sarvasy]

J fsabbasmim
\ sabbamhi

}

saryasmin

f sabbayay/i,
( sabbassam

>

sarvasy^m

( sabbasmim
( sabbamhi

)

sarvasm;

[ 48 1

IQ- f sabba,
' \ sabbe

»

V.

J f sabbehi
( sabbebhi

>f

V

D.

( sabbesanam

}
I
}

A| r sabbesana/w 1
' \ sabbesa/;* J

L. sabbesu

I (S). sarve

8arvd.n
sarve

sarvaih

Plural.
Fern.

w

it

{ sabbesam

. f sabbehi
^- 1 sabbebhi

}

}
}

sabbani (S). sarvani
sabbani * ,,

sar

f sabbahi
( sabbabhi

aarvebhyah {-J~ } 8ar..bhyah{

{sabbahi
sabbabhi

sarvesha«» [ ^^bba^a-a'"

( s'Bbbasam

sarveshu sabbasu sarvasu

9*

sarvasam

>9

> sarvaih

> sarvebbyah

} -

fsabbesanam 1 ,-

isabbesam l^'veshaw

»i.i-'i_ f sabbehi
^^^^'^ i sabbebhi

sabbestoam
sabbesam

{sabbehi
sabbebhi

sabbesu

sarveshu

2. katara

3. katama

4. ubhaya

5. itara

6. anfia

7. annatara

137. After this manner are declined :

8. aniaatama

9. pubba

10. para

11. apara

12. dakkhina

(8). katara, what? which ?

katama, what P which ?

ubhaya, both.

itara, other, different.

anya, other ; other than, dif-
ferent from.

anyatara, one, a certain,
some, some other, another.

anyatama, one of several,

ascertain. *
purva, fore, first, former,

eastern, earlier, ancient,
para, distant, other, etc.
apara, other, subsequent

western, etc.
dakshina, right, dexterous,

southern.

13. uttara

14. adhara

15. ya

16. ta

17. ima

18. amu

19. eta

20. kirn

21. eka

22. dyi

23. ubha

24. ti

25. catu

26. tumha

(S). uttara, higher, upper, nor-
thern, subsequent,
adhara, lower, inferior,
yad, who, which, what, ho

who, whoever,
tad, he ; this ; that*
idam, this,
adas, this, that,
etad, this, this one, that.

kim, who ? which P what {
of what sort ?

eka, one.
dvi, two.
ubha, both,
tri, three,
catur, four,
tvad, thou,
asmad, I.

27. amha

These twenty-seven words are called sahhandmdni (S. sarvanaman).

138. In the words dakkhina, uttara, the fern, sing, loc. may
become dakkhinaya, uttaraya.

The word pubba has, like sabba, two forms for the masc, pU nam^
pubbd, pubbe (S. paryah, pUrve); three in the atl, sing, pubbasmft,

t 49 ]

pnbbamha (S. purvasmat) ; pubba (S. purvat) ; and as many in the lac.
sing, pubbasmim, pubbamhi (S. pOrvasmin) ; pubbe (S. pQrve).

139. If the words aforenamed enter into a, dcandva, tappurisay
or bahubUhi compound, they follow indifferently^ in the nam, pi,, the
declension of nouns or pronouns: ex./ in the dvandva katarakatame or
katarakatama, which ? (plur.)«

In the other cases, these words follow only the declension ot nouns :

ex. of dvandva. Gen, Plur. pubbaparanaw, of the former and subse-
quent; pubbuttar^nam, of the north-eastern; adharuttaranam, of the upper
and lower.

ex. of tappurisa ; m&sapubbaya in the former month ; masapubba*
nam, of former months.

ex: of &aAM6&i^> piyapubbaya, of former pleasure; piyapubbd.-
nai^, of former pleasures.

The context alone can determine the meanings of such com-

•

pounds. E. T.

The hahuhhihi compounds, expressing a direction towards the
cardinal points, constitute the exception', ex: dakkhinapubbassam, in the
southern ; dakkhinapubbassa, of the south-eastern ; uttarapubbassam, in
the north-eastern ; uttarapubbassa, of the north-eastern are excepted.

140. Katij how many?, is declined only in the plural. It F. 92.
follows stems in i :

Declension of kati (plural), how many ?
Plur. N. kati (S). kati

Ac. „ ,y

I. katihi, katibhi katibhih

D. katinam katibhyah
Ab. katihi, katibhi „

G. katinam katinam

L. katisu katfsu

XI. Numerals.

141. Eka (S. eka) is deolined like sabba § 136.

Declension of ekO; m ; eka, /; ekam, n ; one.
Mase, Mase.

S. N. eko (S). ekah Plur. N. eka, eke (S). eko

Ac. ekam ekam etc. Ac. >) i >» ekan, etd«

t so ]

It follows the deolension of eta (S. etad) in the Feminine Cf. §
130. Sing. Dat. and 6eu. ekissa, ekaya ; Loo. ekissam^ ekayam«
The neuter ek&m is declined like sabba;n.

142. Deolension of ubho, (S. ubhau) both,
PI. N. & Ac. ubho, ubhe (S), ubhau

Dat. & Gen. ubhinna^i Dat. „ , Gen. ubhayoh

> ubhayoh

Note. The deolension for all genders is the same. Ubho is altnoit
the only remains of a Dual form in Pdli (Childers) Cf. § 158. E, T.

143. Declension of dvi (S. dvi), two.

M. I,N.
Nom. & Voo. dve, duve (S). Maso. N. V. Ac dvau, Fein, dve

Inst. <fe Abl. dvihi, dvibhi dvabhyam

Dat. & Oen. dvinna?/}, duvinnam Dat. ,, , Gen. dvayoh

Loo. dvisu dvayah

144. Deolension of ti (S, tri), three. P. M

T^^ f ubhosu
( ubnesu

N. & V, tayo
Ac.

»7

}

P. 56.

T f tf hi
■*• I tfbhi

\ tinnannam

Maso,
(S). trayah

trln
tribhih

tribhyah

Fern.
N. tisso

Ac. „
/irhi ^

\trbhi

D. tissannam

(S). tisrah

> tisribjiih
(isribhyak

)

fi

Ab.

ftihi

G. -f H^?'"'* } i

\ tinnannam
L. tisu

\

\ tibhi
G. tissannam

}

i>

tisrinaxfi

. .

tisrishtt

tray3«na;n
trina/w, ^

(m the Vedas))

trishu L. tisu

Neuter. Kom. & Aoo. tini (S. trini). The rest like the Maso. E. T.

145. Deolension of oatu (S. oatur), four.

Masculine.
Nom. cattaro (S). oatvarah

A CO. cattaro, oaturo oaturah

Instr. catuhi, oatubhi. catubbhi oaturbhih

Dat. oatunnam oaturbhyak

Abl. oatuhiy oatQbhiy catubbhi

i»

C 51 ]

Gen. oatunnam (S). oaturnam

Loo. oatusu oaturshu

The Feminine is distinghisbed by the Nom. and Aoo. catasso
(S). oatasrah D. and G. oatassanna^/a (S). D. oatasribhyah, G. oatasrin^m*
The Neuter^ Nom. and Aoo. make oattari, (S). oatvari. The rest
like the masc. E. T.

146. Deolension of pa&oa (8. pafioan), five.
Nom, and Aoo. pafloa (S). pafioa

Inetr. panoahi, pailoabhi pafloabhih

57. Dat. pafioanDam pafioabbya]^

Abl. panoahi, pafioabhi ,>

Gen. paficannam pafioanam

Loo. panoasu pafioasu

In like manner are declined : Dha (S. shash), six > satta (S* saptan),
seven; attha (S. ash tan), eight; nava(S. navan), nine ; dasa f S. da9an), ten.

147. The numerals eka (8. eka), dvi (8. dvi), attha (S. ashtan) P. 94.
lengthen their final touel in combination with other numerals :

Ex. ekadasa (S. ekada^a) eleven ; dvadasa (8. dvada^a) twelve ;
atthadasa (8. ashtada^a) eighteen.

148. The other numerals are :-^

11. ekarasa or ekadasa {8. ekada<^a); 12. barasa or dvadasa

(S. dvada<;a) ; 13. terasa or telasa (8. trayoda^a) ; 14. ouddasa, ooddasat

catuddasa (S. caturda^a) ; 15. pafifiarasa^ panoadasa (8. pa&cada^a); 16.

solasa (8. shoda^a); 17. sattarasa, sattadasa (8. saptada^a) ; 18. attharasa '

Atthadasa (8. aBht&da9a) ; eto.

XIL Conjugation.
Classes of Verbs,

149. The grammarians divide Pali verbs into seven classes.

The First Class is &M, etc, (8. bhavadi), to be^ and fortns the stem
of the four special tenses in various ways:

58. 1st, the radical vowel (i, u) is strengthened^ and to the root thui
modified is added an a : ex. bho -f a = bhava;

2nd, if the root contains the vowel a, the stem is formed by the
iimple addition of an a: ex. pao + a, j= paca, to cook.

3rd, in the first class, the native grammarians also place the
verbs tud, to strike (8. tud. VI), stem tuda ; vis, to enter (8. vi?. VI), stem
visa (8. vi^a) ; nud^ to push (8. nud. VI), stem nuda (8, nuda) ; d««, to show
(8. di^. VI)> stem diea (8. di^a) ; likh, to trace (S» likh. VI)^ stem likhft

[ 52 ]

(S. likha) ; phus, to touch (S. spri<?. IV), stem phusa (S. 8pri(?a) ; ete. which
do not modify the radical vowel.

The verbs of this subdivision, with the exception of the last,
correspond to those of the VI. Class in Sanskrit

4th. The native grammarians also recognize a fourth subdivinon

in the^rs^ class. It comprises the verbs uhose characteristic stems are formed

by reduplicationy viz.:— hu (8. hu III) to sacrifice, stem juho (8. juhO|

juhu) ; hd^ to abandon (8. ha. Ill), stem jaha (8. jaha), jaha (8. jahi) ; dd,

to give (S. da. Ill) dada ; dhd, to place (8. dha III) dadha ; etc.

This subdivision therefore includes the Sanskrit III Class..

150. The Second Class is rudh, etc (S. rudhadi, VII) which inserts
a nasal (in Pali w, in Sanskrit nfl', w)in its characteristic stem, but, in Pali^

the inflections are not added directly to thu stem, as in Sanskrit. This
stem further takes the formative a : ex. rumdha to restrain ; rumdhami
(S. runadhmi) Pres, Sing, 1st pers, I restrain, rumdhama (S. rundhmah)^
plur. 1st person, we restrain.

151. The Third Class is div, etc (S. divadi, IV), It takes the
formative ya (S. ya) in its characteristic stem, the y being assimilated to th»
preceding consonant : ex. div + ycf^ stem dibba (S. divya), to play.

P. 59, 152. The Fourth Class is su (S. QT\x),etc, (8. svadi. V). In order

to form the characteristic stem, nu, nd, or und (8. nu, no) is added to the
root and the u of the nu may be strengthened : ex. from su (8. 9ru) to hear,
are formed the following stems : suno (8. ^rino), sunomi (8. ^rinomi) ; sujpa^
sunami, I hear.

153. The Fifth Class is k{, ete. (8. kryadi. IX) to buy. In order
to form its characteristic stem, nd (S. n^, na, ni) is added to the root : ez*
vikkina + ti (8. vikrmati), he sells,

154. The Sixth Class is tan, etc, (S. tanadi. VIII) to stretchy It
forms its characteristic stem by adding o, u (S." o, u), and yira to the roott
ex. tano + mi (S. tanomi) I stretch, tano + ma (8. tanumah) westreteh*
tanu + te (S. tanute), it is stretched.

155. The Seventh Class is cur, etc. (8. curadi. X) to steal. It adda
e, aya, and i to the root, provided that the root be not terminated by a
collocation of consonants, strengthens the radical vowels, and leftgtAem the
vowel a : ex. coremi (8. corayami) I steal ; cintayati (8. ointayati) Im
thinks ; ghatayati (8, ghatayati) he endeavours.

C 53 ]

156. There remain in Pali some verbal roots conjugated after
the Sanskrit II. Class, i. e. they directly add the inflexions to the root •• ex. as
(S. as) to be, asmi, ahmi (S. asmi).

Inflexions of Tense, Number, and Person.

Voices,

157. Pali, like Sanskrit, has [two] the Transitive or Parassa"

pada (8. parasniaipada) and the Intransitive or Attanopada (S. atmanepada).

158. 'Pali has lost the Dual as well in the verb as in the
noun.

159. The Pali verb has eight tenses (A) four special tenses :
Ist, Present ; 2nd, Imperfect or 1st Preterite ; ird, Optative or

Potential ; 4^A, Imperative ;

and {R) fokr general tenses :

^^Ihy Perfect Reduplicated or 2nd Preterite ; 6/A, Aorist or 3rd
Preterite ; 1th, Future ; 8M, Conditional.

Inflexions.
J 60. Inflexions oi the Persons of the Special Tenses. #

Parassapada

Pa rasmn ipada ( S) .

Attanopada

Atmanepada

{8).

Present.
Singular,
1. 2. 3. 1.

mi si ti ma

mi si ti mas

e se te mhe

e se te make

Imperfect.
Singular.

3.

anti
anti
ante
ante

Parassapada
Paras maipada
Attanopada
Atmanepada

(8).

(S).

3.
t

1.

mha

ma

1.

1. 2.
a, am o

am s

im se ttha mhase

i thds ta ma hi

Potential.
Singular.
2.

3.

1.

PlvraL
2.

tha

4ha

vhe

dhve

Plural.
2.
ttha

ta

vham iihxxm

dhvam anta

Plural,
2.

3.

u

an

3.

Par
Par

Att .
Atm

eyyami, (e) eyyasi, (e) eyya, (e) eyyama eyyatha ejynm

(<S). ?/(au
eyyam

yas
etho
Uhds

ydt

etha

ita

ydma ydt a yus

eyyamhe eyyavho eram
imahi idhvam {ran

(The Imperative is on page 56 J .

P. 9

[ 54 1

Paradigm of Conjugational and Temp<

Tenses,

Peesbnt.

Imperfect or
1st Preterite.

Optative or
Potential.

Tmperativi

Kacoajana's
Terms.

1. Vattamana.
vihhatti.

5, Hiyattani, v.

3. Sattami, v.

2. PafLoam!, t

Voi-
ces.

N.&P.

Pali.

Sanskrit.

P.

5.

P.

S.

P.

8

S. 1.

mi

mi

a (am)

am

eyjami (e)

ydm

mi

di

•

i.

ei

81

8

eyyasi (e)

yds

hi

hit

ipada

3.

ti

ti

a

t •

eyya (e)

ydt

tu

tu\

«9

s

P. 1.

ma

mas, masi

mha

ma

eyyama

ydma

ma

dm

^

Ck

2.

tha

tha

ttha

ta

eyyatha

ydta

tha

ta,i

3.

anti

anti

a

an

eyyum

yus

antu

and

S. 1.

e

e

im

•

eyyam

^ya

e

ai

•

2.

se

se

se

thds

etho

ithds

88U

9V(

>pad8

3.

te

te

ttha

ta

etha

Ua

tam

tan

P. 1.

mhe

make

mhase

mahi

eyyamhe

{mahi

§,mase

dmai

2.

vhe

dhvl

vham

dhvam

eyyavho

{dhvam

vho

dhw

3.

ante

ante

tthum

anta

eram

{ran

antam

and

The terminations in brackets are not gi^en by Kaccayana* Inflezionf. in i
*. In the Aorist alone the common finals of the various inflectional taOfM

[ 55 ]

Inflexions of all Verbs.

Reduplicated
Perfect or
2nd Preterite.

AoRiST OR 3rd
Preterite.

Future.

Conditional.

4. Parokkha, v.

6. AjjatanI, v.

7. Bhavissanti, f.

8. KalatipattT, t7.

P.

8.

P.

8.

P.

8.

P.

a.

a

a

im

am

ssami

sydmi

Bsaw

Byam

e

tha

t, 8

ssasi

syasi

Bse (ssa)

syas

a

a

I, i

t

ssati

syati

SS& (ssa)

8yat

^hsL

ma

mha

mhay ma

ssama

sydma

ssamha (ssamha)

sydma

ttlxw^

a

ttha

ta, ta

ssatha

ayatha

ssatha

syata

u

U8

um, (u)

K

■s.

Uy im8u\njiy iiR

ssanti

syanti

ssamsu

syan

-

•

1

e

a

am, i

ssam

sye

ssam

sye

Itixo

se

se

thas, thas

ssase

syase

ssase

syafhds

Uha

e

a

ttha ta> ta

•

Bsate

syate

ssatha

syata

mhe

make

mhe

mahi

ssamhe

sydmahe

ssamhase

sydmahi

vho

dhee

vham

dhvam dhvam

•

ssavhe

syadhve

ssavhe

syadhvam

re

ire

u,(iw8u)

um anta^ ata

ssante

syante

ssimsu

syanta

l^kring from those in italics in the S, columns^ are taken from Williams' or Benfey's Sansk
^reHf and they will be found similar to those of the Imperfect. E. T.

[ 58 ]

CO T?
C8

08

'9

s

•73
e8

CO

»c8 "5

^ is

■♦a

o
a

08

1

03
OS

5S

fO

G<l

S

5S

>>

PU|

8

4

Q
oa

08

•4*

08

s

^ s

p

I

r-, S

^ 8

I

o
a

J '1 m

«
S

-§
S

08
B

^

K

:^

«

1

o

08

B

«

>oB

S

^

^

>^

^

Q

v5=>

»4

^

o
o

c8

■3

o

p

08
S

o

s

o

CO

04

CO

^

g
I

o3

•^ s:i t* b 5^ i;.

- ' HA

o o ^

P- > 5>

C8 08 « ^ ^ "^ >^

"*A

fc^& «

Pi

o

.a

•8
108

P

d

sss 3 g a ^-^^ 2 s ?, «

-t^ '4^

13 lZj "^ O O « S

;s

OQ

^

CO
IC«

^ -i3 -S

Q>

OQ

ice

p 3 J

9*

I08

I — » ^

'.I '^

ICQ ^^

^* b ^

p eA ee

t >^ >-•

O o p

P O ©

fO

'.S

•4

tmi

'^
2 -§-§

00

08

O

O

^

•73 ^

08

E

QQ

CD

OQ

s

OQ

s
p

'53 b ^ ^

'b "73 ^ CJ U O
I 1 I I » » -ll

S « 6t

I

r

08

Ph

1^

OQ

: fc

'2 "^

H

.fe .£

•73 •§

a

a

OD

08

I

<0

a

a> o

a* d-

CO ca

1 I

I

a

® o c8 s 5

CO CO

QQ

e

ei

o

^.

pi s
5

I

^

[ 57 ]

CO

88

I

O^

e8

Od P

•5.

a

OS

P

a

08

03

P
P
»4

2

SSI

e8 OS «o

88

s s

o >

P P

^- a

•< p

<5

S
IS

• ^

CO ^

-«^ eS
•«» O >•

P P

g{

05

CD

O >

P P

00

O

•2.

a

P
»4

oo

e8

P

P

a

P
P
Pi

1

OS

5i-

Si.

S

OS

O

o
o

PS

DQ

88

88

P P :s a P

fc!

s

N

09

P
*JP

P

£

J a s ^ ^ K £

^ "^ -5

*^

* o P

P

00
H

GO

OS

OS

o

00

eo

^x S CD

e .s

GO

P

a?

QQ

o

w
B

^ 2

I a

p
cp

be ®

O

P C

I *

g m

Si 'S

08

CO

►
88

CO

€8 Q

94

2

CO

88

a

88
88

00

-I

C4

io8

a

88

108

>

88

88

O
>
08

88

s

o

QQ

08

a

u

88
08

88

08 .4^

i-C -*^
-*^ 08

ctf 03
08 08

ic8

ice's

a 2

08 08

88 88

3

1^

OS 88

© s ®

€ (^ !S

O

CO

§

88

O

O
P3

OB
88

88

OS

«
$>
«

•«

fO

CO

88

C4-4

O

O

©
P4

©

CO

3^

01

O
08
OS

oB 08
08 08

O

cs

a

s

©
tJQ

O
OS

N s

ip
rP

jg M €q

oo

03
OS

o

O

•9
OD

U

88

S^.

[ 58 ]

CO

fO

C8

08

s

•73

OS

w

•c6
TJ

I.

s

• 1*4

o
a

08

I

03

5S

fO

(M

4

Q
oa

OQ

^

tmi

to

S

OQ

OS

•c« -^ -'^

s

los a

8 *-; GQ

E

o

••a
QQ

CD
OQ

5

m

s

53

s

>

PU|

8

P
P^

r-, S

^ 8

I

o
a

f

o

'5'

08

•4*

s

I I

•«

^ •§

ice

^ 8

OS

B

ice

«

S
^

08
S

^ o

o
OS

a

ice
o

a

o

be

CO

04

o

^

I

CI

CO ® ®

•9

o3

•P-P "^

fO • Q ^
OO as d

IS

at

^ c«

^ g- -§• ^ ^

^ -jQ

<S

p p 5s rg -a

r^^

rO

-5 ^ "** ^ ^

• fH

s

a ^ .1

loe

a

10 s >^

o fe^l^^^

^

«

*^ :s ::3

^ ^

08

§

jt « .8

tj '^ ^
5 2^

Is %

: fc

H

fO

2 5

6?

9

a

a

•r*

08

• fH

I

p«

<0

•ce

a> o

a* d*

OQ OQ.

I

a

CO CO (3; I

e

•s

6?.

t 59 ]

9

V>

O^

B

s

08

03

5 ^

a

►>
>^

H S

u

O

08

a

io8
« 08

d
-8 >^

08
^ M

«8
>»^

M

« '2!

WW

.s

5Si

S

Ul

>>

S

08

08

«

^

J4

;8
;s

i

a

c8

o
o

P4

6

s
c

•M

a

o

2 H « 53

fl C St s
■5 CS Q «

i

08

S
Q

ftT

oa
Ji

^

o

C8

o

ts

be

s

a-
ii-t

'>
08

103

fl'

08

a

II— «

08

««

5* HI

o

9

MS

'Z
u

O

s s»

s I

00 j^

C8 «D

«

iS

^

w _

5^

«l

S^

00 '^

4e

S §>

08

08
08

n3

«8

a

03
T3

-« ^5 ^

08

ic8
®

: «

I

9

3

OQ
U

o

s ^

08 08

>> >^ »

« © © ®.x -5**

o8 -oS bj* 03 ^5

•73 '^ "TJ no ^

tl

*§

io8
0-

a^>

M

9i.

oa «,-»-, "^

•m

a

*0k

m

a

u

I

«
,0

3

•o
O

S ^

c8 «o^

^«

.3

©

08
n3

OQ
•C«

©

jj "IM •^

Pi

s^

s

3 S

ic3
nD

QQ

a

o

l-l

CD

"V*

loB
•T3

i«

HI

t 60 }

I

S

^ OS

08 leS

s a S §

tc t« tA &ao

^

a

o ►n

Ki-

QQ

0»

<D

a

. a

08

a o

OQ

'O eh

-S !

11^

o
p

OB

sw

• •

o '3

P 'A

a
a

too

•M

b£

08

a
a

08

GO

a'^

2 ®

o
a*

p

^

QQ S

I

o
o

CO

P

08

S 3

p

ll-j

OB « <

S3

I

t 61 ]

P
O

a

«

a

Ck

fO

<4

CO

1-4 :j ^ ^

5 ^ rH o >. 5>

p

08

•73 'U

•§
•§

p

8

I

5

C^

o

p

eS

a

O

P

53

s9

o
u

3

eS

08

o

P

CO

e8

a

o

u

e8

Jt4

"3

g

P ^3
08 Q

08

a

o
p

08

08
•73

oB

M ::s

«
^

08

a

•c8
■T3

e8

08

.1 ««

ICO Q

:;:5 P

o
p

e8

O^

-i P

o

P

e8

rP

o

u

as

44

2^

B'

u

P-
II— I

P

0*

O

P

08 cs

'T3 '73

iC9 ^

o

pa

p

p

08

GQ

S
«

P
o

OS

a

o

rP

P

^

^
Q

leS

-a

08

M -P
\ci >cQ 'c<8 .p^

e8 e8 08 O)

^3

P
P
»-i

08

a

led

P
P
u

08

JP
^3

P
P

»4

I

'^

'^

^
•^

p

S
^

o

leS
•T3

- sS t>

rP

P
CO

a

•c«

pp

•T3

P
P

'X3

108

S

O

o

p

C8

5t

3

U

OS

w 5

08 «

P

S
^

Id

s

■^

•73

P

1

•9

08

QQ

S^

R 05.

OQ

CO

P4

OQ

[ 62 ]

p
<

o

H
<1

oa

>

•2

QQ

a

>

too

o

a

o

St

Q d

c«

^ <D
.5i -w

> ^

^ J

>

CO

S

03

o
o

<M

a

^

« .S

CO ®

^ a

03

e8 Q

: s

9

OS

08

M CQ

■4-3

o3

o
o

too

o

d
o

.9
d

03

rd

a.

•o

«

'^

V«

CO

o

s

d
d

a
5

to

^

►<

Q

St

CO

d
d

•«o

to

C^

d
d

03

00

s:

d

/N^s-^

d

-4-3

«

s:

o

o

P3

•

GO
OQ

OS

d

08

St
5

R >

H ^

a
>

i i

08 St

03 Q

1 «

o3 Q

08 ^

08

pd

C8 CS

rd »<

c8 Q

d

08
08

a

08

08

S-i
08

08

w

rd

s

io8
M
08

08

08

-*^
08

08

a
IS

t<a

d

08
08

^a

08

08
rd

08
08
08

oa

C8

Id

c8
08

tH

-S ^

I

a

St

I

s

<«

o

f a

? s

rd •§

08

03
C8

c8

to

!«3 tS

03

OQ
08

08

a

to

00

08
'T3

08

08

to

-§

08 Q

pd »<

C8 <S

OQ

08 OS

rd r^t

? s

a

o
.t-l

;i4 ^ *^ «S ISA

J « « I •«« II

^

s

^ 2

11

! •»■

Id ^;3

rd r«^

M OQ

r^

►5C

CQ

Hi g^

i

c&

el.

[ 63 3

e8

M

o
o

OS

o

k^
>^

O

OS
o

a

?^

O
O
OS

to

08

OS

o

03

>^

a

OS

s
a

St

OS

O

ai

St

CO

s

CM

S •-;

C3>

led

•T3

St Sc toc '=^ ^

5

s

o

e8

a

03

CO

08

P

CD

O

>

08

;>»
<D

00

s

>^

P

o
G-

P

OB

s

03
M

T3

08

s

Q

^

O

^

08
u
o

P
P

s

p

08
>
08

(M

O

a-

p

OD

08

p-

p

V3

Si-

s

08

a

oa

a

CQ

CO
OQ

08

O
O

CO
OQ

08

: N

p

OD

^

6?

.55 :s

OD

P

•2 "5J

M (K

[ 64 ]

M3

CO

08 -^

5 «

S S

CO

OS

eS

o
>

CQ

GO

08

a

a-

CO

C3
OQ

a

St

si-

a

it.

oi

:§

o
>
u

o

OQ

eS

B

a

»4t

?i-

-4>»

ri4

•a

J* k. *. W
Q s a

•A* "^ i^^

s

icS

a

o

o
o

«

in

^ -g

^ ^

OQ

OQ

u

S g

OQ

.4^

3

08

1

'

*M 1

.

^«

08

?3

"*.»

^

r<

.

•T3

a

#

-§

2

•

>

a

>

08

1

CO

. a

^

T3

-§
^

CD

■

^ 08

i

CQ
08

g

%<^^

«

en

«l

a

»

• •

d

^

r£3

'^

H

#1M

t ice

c8

^
'^

«

«

s
s

a

08

'TS

^

««

s

Ph

-^l

^^

•4-3

^

z6

Q

bO

€8

S

08

CO eS

03

0'

;z5

04

CO «

«

TS

'^

53

• •

CQ
OQ

C«

<

1^

■4^

CQ

•

•

Q

OQ

OQ

•

00

9

f 1

A^

Q

^
J

04

^

^

^

1^

<5

TS

^

%4

CQ

1^

s^

.
— ^

•

^
'U

fl

d

P
P

Ph

1

ri *

Q

^

^
S

f-i

^

\

t

«
I-
08

^'

1

^^

^

PL| 0,

a

08

^

-

*!•»

Z2

•^3

'^ a

^

X

•

00

5

•

'

H

•
i-H
00

s .

(§1

•
•
•

g

t'i

•
•
•

•-I

^

:<

.»

TS

'>3

leS

:s

S

TJ

'^

u

w

o

p4

OQ

s ?r

C 65 J

CO f3

«».

^

•««-

«L

.V.

*•>•

&

«

1

S

CJ

S

>^

•

^

^

•%-

S

•

••»

^3

^-

§^

.i3

1^

•0

CD

T3

«8

•**

*«

S^

O

3.

0>

-4^

o

09

ec

{^

13
o

Ci

•rJ

^

08

0)

•73

repla

ming

• -

'E.

ts

00

o

fe>

S3

o

•fH

c>

^

•^
V

-^^i

^"^

;2

•«
^

rG

Oi

^

U

■4^

-4^

C8

-4>>»

a

P

<

Ph

•Si

I

s

>
a

OS

c8

CO r^

rC •<) 1^

t

o

<

08 9
> &

IS *»

• ^

•^

00

r-l 5>

a

08

CO 5

C8

o

08

o»

9

%5.

: s-

CO

en

C8
U

"El

a
o

Oi

U

a>

CO

OS
oc-

•4-3

C6

03

B

cS
be

03
•■—a

ec

o

•4J
O

si

P^

'^

OP
-*J

08

c

'El

p

•TJ-
a;
;-i

•» CO ^^

CI

C4

H

OS

M

H
P4

P-l

Q

(<

CO

O

X

H

0©

=1

1

s

a
cc

P

bc

c

• «-l

o

tn
OS

•«*
•2

S CO

i?8 "v- Q

<N O *•* «t ^

HO.

•0

^ .5 c: ,^ 08 t l!1i

•

4^

•
•4.9

§

a

.4.3

Ika

Ph

^

<i

^

>=»

*«.»

'rm

•i<*

K

t;

<i

•<^

• ^^ '

«c

'^•^

00

^ "^

«K

Sf

•c«

C

ic8

Ph

CQ

Ph

c&

■7? 'O

rP <•

CO

cc l^

[ 66 ]

v..

4

3 -I

g8 c8

I

8

'3>

e( US

a a
"St

n O O S "

S S 2 *rt

C8 0« g» rt

rt 08 * r

I

g8
bO

.5

t^ ««

(l4

[ 67 ]

E$ ^

^ 0° s

i s I

mi m^ OS I

CO

s s s sS"

oS ^ es 08 bfi

bO bfi be §D 5"

ea ce 08 c8

CO

CM

S B

03 c8
be bO
08 03

OS
>•.

a

08

bo

c3

ft<

eS

M

OQ

ic8

[I

a

en
ic3

08
•»^

OS "^

2 08

:S «

'a S

P P*

U p

OQ

p ^

p ••

c8 08 c8
c8 c8 c8

9^

08

OS

a

•c

08

Ph

P

P. 2^

08 e8

bz ^

o o

o o

e8 e8

08
rP

08
O
eS

c8

rP

a

CO

00

bo

r3

00

a §

.00 ^

CO ^ K<3

.^ O 08

<M

CQ

0) 00 CQ

^ Q 1C8

$1.
S CO

Ok

a

P

a
a •"

>s

a
43

• •\

•

•1^
P

c8

•4^

CO

'^

••\

€8

gs

c8

• •

St

•4^
• 1-4

•

9^

OQ

ic8

^ :ti

> '^

o

u

c3 «*H

S 3 .S' ^-

^

s

08

s

I

s

a

a

o

^-1

OQ

ic3

K

^

00

^ -^ '^

•«

4 'I S

a a a

o o o

«G «^ cS

a

o
u

08

13

08

s

08

a

o

GQ

• •\

• »\

bC

a

<L ■:

CO

E 68 1

O

Ph

c:

C^

e*

eS

J
'Sr

ec

t

s

8

O

CO

CO

s

O S

eS

• " • (fi Hi

M CO. r3' L"^

8

o

00

a

o
o

OS

5- ©>

2- ^

• •> CO

K

s ©.

o

en

C

c

.S
©

) -» "K. >*- •♦«» -*^

• C 52 P3 J5 ^3.

CO. OS ^ K 5 ^

CO «Si OQ. 5j^ .-^
SQ CO m or. ^

CJ a> ^

eS o

00 ~'-<,

®- « OS

fe "IS

c^ S ^

o «-

■^ o

a

s

o

^ ^

o

a;

cS

8

08 ce

CO

M

"5 ^ o

O o ^

o

c o r^

P

02

K^ ' e! e ©

Q ^ rS :5= •^

n «« 00 CD

O/

©

P

<•«

•

op

.5

-X:

•<*»

•*<»

^

"^

S'

00

©

^

<!*■ ©
r^' £ S £

SQ

CQ

C/J

s

©

M

en

«3.

* . ^

^ ©

Cm © .:^

^«S eg

.tr c8

.S H

ft.

e^ £

tc o
be .4-

• 9\

CO 03

Jf © CT*
o ^

©

U
O

o

03

£ .^

o ^
o

-2 ca

OS OQ

§ S

a, 2

^ s

© p

JC . CO

p

00 ^
00 .^
I— < OQ

o

p

©

p
p

©

CO

GO

p

o

©

2

OJ

s .

00 ©

u

CO

•

s

©

u

.0

»-« "^ © ^ \S
C8 Q cS ^ 5

" 00 OQ «0 2g

o

e3-

EQ
OQ

CO S

o
©

00

£ 5

03

W 00 03

OQ

©
©

08

I

c >

£

03 ©

C3 ^

. '^

•= «

rP 08

I «

to.

•:H •©

rt rP

?^ be

« .£

CO • —

ot >

•« ©

" c

© rP

icf- £

S I

rP

a «-•

06

eS

©

OS

ip

P
P^

eS

«Q

©

a
£

03

CO

©

O P

P §

© S

^ g

£" t.
8 t«

R 00
OS
QQ
CO

©

p

O

o

p
p

'©

09 fc

© q

.S' i

•8 <

«■ t

O

P

<

©

©

J©
P4

X

©

•5

OS

p

OS

© eS
be p

g ^

03 OD
© c

(^ ee
vP
©

a

CQ

P
P

= si

5 i

• •

2 '^

Ph

I w 3

> Si

e5 ^»

CO ^

CO "C:

ft*

p

03
«Q

JO

es

^ it ^

St 2 «

Q
O

oo

o

icS

CO

CO

e3

2

«
^

^

Q

^3
1^

2

••»

B

po »o

C5

CO

C3

n3

•2 O

^

«

pO »o

o

Si

o

CO

es

CO

>

CS

^ O

o
'^

.■2

O

^a

O

08
»-•

tea o
2 ^

'^'^

° i

»^ -
CO

9 *T3

Cm d

CO O

CO CO

^ a
o I

I ^

* .—
^ '^

o -M
(/} rQ

• •«

to

CO

=1

€8
CO
CO

o ^

CO ^-Q

^13 »?•

•73
Pi

C8 pfi

^ I

M

s

a
o
o

• ••»

S J a

^ o

O '^ '^

-'^ OQ «}

if

• fii^ • ■»
« I

« .2

*3 o

li

CO O

f-S CO

" ej

^ -5
r^ >>

cs

O

c8 ej

^ -a

o ■*"

"^ a

CQ 2

Si s

.2 w

O ^

0>

a

k«k

P

CO

% %

_o P

O

'^ p4
C8 "

.2 -M
CO

08 O

^!

« a

08 O

p

a 3.

CO 1^

.2 ^

•c ^

© ^-^

08

08 +

^ i

P c8

O CO

,u CO

•M P*

S '^

2 -^

p ^

:p» o

09 08
^08 "TJ

P «*

05 _r

o
o

-a"

•k ••

GQ

08

CO

CO

§ 08
Sa 5 ^ -g

GO

'.+3 .^ I ^"-^ ^^ w — * ^*

08 *J I —.-..- "S —

_r3 o8 -^-u-j'rs oe.*-»

%

^

pO »o

P n wS

CO ^ 08

03 *P

08
C3 i-^

o o

pS a

CO ^

O 'a

»-• O

. u

.- 00.

*p -•*
% g

g S

/"-^ e8

^^ CO

CO JLd

g > ©

08 S

a CO
>% ©

rP ^*
©

GQ
QQ ^

§ 3

2 C '•

:s « 2

6 a s

§^ -^

o **^ o

p --a .

•1^ c8 ^""^^

••• 2 '^

CO 03

Q © tM

^ %m

^ h ©9

tZ CO •->

2 S P^

r9 S '^

•^ O oa

« . la

•'^ OQ w

2 •M •

.S CO

>«i». CO t^^

•*• ?^ 5

C g S

s

« - ••*

^ © 44

5 o 5

<« •♦^ «

as «

^ a s

M 3

o ©
o *^

^ €8 «

a M «

O)

OQ CO

08 -a ^

^ c8 63

CO 2q oo

S p "^

^ S eS

CO S

2 Ji

o>

•4

A^g;

:e

^
b*

»*i

i 70 3

o>

^

t5

60

s s s

s s s s

a 5. •§ S,

8 « S 3"

>

4
4

l>
H

3

a

tdO

a

<s

CO

0)

03
.00 *xJ

o P

to

_W ^ ...4

■4^ CO ^

•* >-» O

£ ^ W)

>^ P-l /S

wo o -S
o

•««

«

03

ca

O

GQ

• ^4

03
en

OQ

CO •*■»

^ g
• o

°0 ^

«
««

S

<M

c3
to

O
u

GQ

a

o

o

CO

eS

08

«0

c8

03
to

CO

O

O
CO

(O

08

CM

o

08 Q>

CO O

.2 ca

OS o

•^ CQ

§ 2

c4 O

o q

^ ••*

2 ^

3 s

0) c>
CO -^

o> a

O

•J3

a a I i I

s o o o g

^ 4- JS * *

S §

o o

CD

o o

CO r
••» *•

a I

c2

CO, S

* ©

o e*

CO

08 IHH

o

CO

a

V.
Oh

T3

a

o

CO

to

B

CO

a

o

I

O

s

>»-4

o

03

_ *

•Tj CO
•p4 CO

•* a

o

? • OS.

^ ^^ 8

s> a

o

a

;3

5 «

I* >:

> l^

O OQ

w) a

o .^

60

s

O

H-l

a

O

eo

a n

I08 <•

•A ©

CM

s *^ 2 ^

r ►g

•• •

••

W .M

o«-<"

s

^^^i

I 71 ]

«e6 .S

flS 'S

CO

a

i^ o

JQ •^^

a

o

00

O
oo

O

••A
O
•8
u

o

a

o

a

CO 52

0-

00
CO

«0

c8

*4

2

C3

2 <n'

a

08

c3
m

00

08
08

QQ
• »-<

>

08
08

oo

00 •<(

CO 09

03 O

<8

> e

08 «ark

CO <»
08

s

Pi

^ C8

T3

••»

a ^^

C8 .. 08

I §-^

■I '^ flS

o ^ ®

S3 *<'^ -^

^ rH 'S 'Si ^

02
QQ

Ph

103

08

rO^

a

a

03

03

»

CO

m

03

• 1^

• ^-

>

>

c8

o8

^^

^ JO

08

08

pa

CO

k9 oS

03 CO
CO CO

> ^

08 08

-§-§

i &

-^ o

s

® CO

ra :a

^ 's I

a g «

CD CO n

c3 CO /

H :a .

T3

a

08

o

a

00

oo

CO

CO

• ^i^

• «ii4

>

>

xi

08

^M

^-Q

08

68

o

9

CO <i

08 Q

s ^

ic3 ^

BO QO

> ^

03 «

ja '<.

e8 C8

o& ^

00 •<;

03 CO

> &

08 S

C8 ^

00 5

08 ^

CO •<»

CO oo

03 Q

08 ^

a

o

ja

o

■CQ

a

o

•8

US

08
>
03

ja

CO

08

^^
03

>

.a

>

08

JO
08

CO
08

ja

08

>
08

ja
.a

08
99

c8

CO

08

ja

(D
>
c8

ja

©4

•« *!

,4

cq

Cm

O

O

I

I

^6

>
08

rP

JO

P
»-i

jQ

I

•"s

08
oo

CO

<5

08

A ^^ — ^

P4 <0

CO .2
> S

Ah qq

» 9

> JO

«8 ^

;§ 5

■ a

fl '^
•-• ^•

00

08

e^

G^

3

a

>

«8

u.

:3

GQ

CQ

59

t n 1

»t i-

i

5-3
; -Si

•a I I 'I g jj

to iii "c a^ =i FM

j; « S S " £ -• .2 - J rH

.■5 -.^ -a a:

^ I 1„| 1 1

QJ fit C^ «" .Ti *^ tS T

[ 78 2

fL,

00
CO

^

• •

p

a

€i

9*

s.

o
o

•
r— 1

o

M

08

•

-*j

•»
q;

^

o

•4^

>

S

5

Q

^

SO

d

R«

C8

^

X

>

-Q

ffi

a

C4-1

p

•»*

so

n3

^

•4>>

«M

««-■

P4

o

«

a

o

-1-9

-♦-»

n3

eS

•«

.9

O

>§

lHj

:2

Q

«\

•

•«^

a.

e8

H

K

C^

K

^

^

op

Q

H

n3

s

rJQ

a

5^

§

^

^ ^
^ ^

0)

7S

««H

>

5*

^^

J»

Si

CO

vz>

s»

• z^

2

p

OQ

•J?

e«

«

§

•4^

fti

Q

®

0)

a

O

<*J

^

c^^

O

CO

c

•«J

S

•»

K

^3

«>
^

g

EH

a>

*i:

s

5:-

tt

rH

is

•

9

*«>k

>

•^

a

OT

9

^

9

^

^

s ^

a a -^

CO S S §,

g 5 -<

^ 03 S»

. a o r^

^ -S ^ ^

"2 -S ^

S c ^

03 03 '^

CD

§ § ^

'S 'S ^

•£ 'S ^

p p ^5

e« 03 lO

US ^

. b ^

«> 2 2 ^

•^ -^ ;as

g g ^^

P P ^

€8 CS lO

en CO

03 08

. a a

^ pC pTq

P

Oft

p <s

C8 O

icS c

2 '^

2 p -;i

P p ^

€8 e8 1^

^ ^ ^

00

t*
r^

[ 74 ]

Ph

1

I

® "TJ o 'Ti _?

flS

•

06

^ CD §

fi C-

00

g

etS

br

OQ

u

- .s a

« S o

general tense

l-i
O

>

CO

•

■ •*

• M

o
bO

CO

^ o c>

'^ '-13

II

•

d

•-• .M
. ©

•3

»d

•

5&i O K«

3 I

o

^

^

V.

Q ^ r0

>

e3

oo

bc

.s

© -*a — ^

a '3

•br.2

o
o

c3

§

be

be a

^

CO

f« 08 a &I

a

c2

•5

CO
to

03

■1

02 -S
CO c8

so

^ bO

. .5

Ow •♦o*

2 «3

•

oo

CO

>

cS

r0

•
o

t/saiere or Cawsa/ is formed by adding the
I is strengthened by vfiddhi, provided alway
sonants : ex from bhu, bhaveti or bhav

o

ay serve f<

Id

Cm
O

^1 ^

•

3?

>

>

be

eg

>

GQ

■£. a

La

>^ 03

•

so

S

oo

t

be

CO

-♦o

03

o
a

OS

•

O CO

CO r0

»

U
CO

«

so

*to

eS
08

•

-/""N CO

o8 I. •

CO

1

ft?

9

08 g

CO
CO

• l-i

"^

O ^ OS
©^ g «

.^ II

o

> o

^.S

'^ -^

•fcT €8

Q u

§!>..§*

£ ^

P4 S

o

•»o

CO

•♦o
«0

O
-1^

4^*

bc

•«

S

C8

bC

o
o
u

o

^ OS

C8
c3

a
bc

09

OQ

OQ

oi
>^

08

r0
O

o

03

08

0U.

■4J»

be bC

t

• »-« •^H

,-0 '^'

o ^

bc ^

i ^

« -^ 'JS

-1-3

08

08 p0
bO bC

-t-3

s

I— i s

so.

oo

00

^ 08

be s

OQ ^

^ ^'

if ^

O C8

^ a

'^ :

-^ :

••o
O

«o
CO

'to

•»o

00

O

o

u

u
o

03

.0

OQ

8

-u
O
O
l-i

(D

J0

H

-1^

c8
c8

09

■*»

o
e
i-i

o

5«

o

ci:

be

a

o

CO

u

CO

08

rS

rd

be

0)
>

r

• 1-4

CO

-4^

e8

CO

• 1-4

0)

§

0u

CJ

«*H

K«

o

rd

OQ

G<1 03 G<1

Id

OQ

08

08

pd
ice

-a

00

o

94

08 >>>>

*^ Jj -ti If

ic6^^ ®

O

o

^H 09 CO ^

[ '5 [

&i

i

itimi.flJ.|.5iSlsi-K

lllllllll

Illation

1- If

•1 l-= .- '"'^

f Mi 1 1 II

k ill 1 |. 11

•^, 1,1 t=-s|l-3|l- 3 a

mmimmi

« S.S;5 s g,Sf3S-g '8,233 S i g.

1

'4 -11

S.|. ■ -3 -. '.

H 1 I'll

lllllllfl

if

l|l

iii
III

I

1!

'

1 S ? S ,2

1 •s.-s.ii-ii 1.3^ 1,1,3 lail 1

,£ S 2 3 ,2 5 £ 5 3,2 " ,25 °,25S 2

lllllllll

SI'S

pop

a

"P&S^S-PB

=mP

« P

gsl#lll,3S|:E;.s3-3ll1 i.

■3il«y|i^

j:3

1-3 .?

!»■ fr H-

§ -5*

UU-4^tsss.^=,&siU s

■sll^sllli

n- > >

|-£

„,o,-»=o.o-2S322G52gS S

sassssass

m^n

=c «

[ 76 ]

CO

^

bo

a

08

" 1:9 "-^ "^ S

.. J5 "^ o8 o 2

. ■§ ^

08

«

-2.

_ca ••-• .1-1 -

00 tS '*!2 ••-• .-* ^

I ^ .§ "I -S '2

S '^^ '"^ •'^ o. C^

P4 «Q

bo

a

II

a

o
o

o

7S

O

o

GO

d
>
bo

03
O

, O •••

OQ
O

a

I

CO
Of

t '7 3

p;

•li^

p

o

q

•- CO •♦J « fl

ri CO S CO •«« e)

•iZ "^ *^^ "^ ••^ en

^ja ^ ^ t-S fl CO

0) 00000

^ r4 ^ r4 »^ r^

es

>

-3

cS

o
^3

en
O

es

0a

eS e) eS c4

.4^ CO -«irf CO n es

,^ •« .^ ,>2 ^ 5Q

-a ^ rS P^ ^ CO

C3 2 o o o o

^ ^ ^ ^ .£J ^3

03

GO

en

• »-<

O 3

a

eS

a ^

^ a

CO

a

CO

i:« .::j

1-3 • •-• 1:0

rn ^13 ^ -CI3

o S o o S

a

eS

a

CO

o

a

en

00

>
a

eS

S

^

o

(O

o

o

to

wo

«
ft.

cn

O

9t

^ O

•S

CO
09

^ -3 CO

•r2 »n^ 'r^

^ ^ Jui 'Ti

o o o -g

'^ ^ -a ^

Q e3

••4 CO CO

•*jj .CO CO

CS ^ >

CO ^S ci

<3

CO

•o

CO
O

CO S!

.2 CO BO

-g ^ ^ -^

o o o o ^

'^ ^ rS3 .:q ^

\^^ o

•iM eo

in QQ

CO >

CO ctf

O ^

(3

a

o

a

o

a a

"- »c3 '2 iS

a 2 s § -

1.^3 '^ '^ p^ "*

0290

a

GO

o

CO

• •-<

>

eS

M '^ ^ x\ j^ ^ a

h-i t-t a >• s. t!

*^ •-• K K > t>

o

u

d
o

^ §

.§ ^
^ ho

•2 o
Q o

an

o

►

u
o

U

«2

:S
13

^3

•••

00

=^

. eS Cj
O o

8 S

c3 rt

;^ . uj CO

^ C>3 CU CO

*:; ^^ o <j

Q^ rS -a
^ PS

a a

a a

(O CO

CO CO

o o

p s

a ca

• o o
2 CI

4- ^

T^ O

^ 2

a

CO

o

a

CO

09

C3 Q

•kk O

Q a

«3 tC

o

'/I .

(O ^
o

'^ ^-^

•4.^ n

•t; o

a s

-2 -^

d
a m

e3

^ 2

— ' o

eS

es

O ^.

H

<3

a

o

^

CQ

O

»-• s §

5 ^

<i4->

•
•*•

•

•»4

p

•4^

B

a

• •

• •

• •

••

u

u

u

u •

J*

J=*

CS

a csi

Ph

P^

Pi

ft^ QO

OS
P

o

'^

p

o
O

• •

Pi

p^

c3

P
O

S '-^

P T3

•• ••

u u
d c3

Pi A4

-S< ©

ti P

s *

^ •

• i

CO ^

l-H CO

O

a

o

a o

eu «

*» ■*■»

es ei
u ja
cS •S
o -P
OQ

s "-^

o

CO

OQ

/'"^

$5

u

C«

:S.

•

•M*

^

QQ

^

5

s.y

»«

Q

•

• •»

^

es

/"^S

S

p4

OS

>

e«

u

,»-

^

p

<*H

-4

•

• fiH

^

©^

<«ia

03

• •»

a

>*-•

■<-»

JS

P

00

"p

c«

^

^

<:>

M

K9

a

^

^

e«

■*a

ho

OQ

•

•44

•

M

u

OQ

4«

0*

s-/

P4

>o

t 78 }

s

OS

a

•8

^ o

.O CO

a

o

08

CO

08

t a^

;3

4^

o

••id

90

§•

a.

o

-*»

O

^ d

S g
o -^

© ^

*^ r2

"^ ©

e .

s: o

^ a

CS (-1
S 08

OQ -4-3

9 O

a. ^

2 0)

p4 a

o

U

o

o
a

n3
•• ic8

ai ^

O O

s* a

CO

>

u

«2

•T3

O)

CO

O
08

0)

OQ

^ .

OQ

o

o

S3
O

a

a

08

OQ

O

CQ

,a
i-i

<2

CO

•Si

ft.

CO

I

CO

-^a ,M "^

^^8
CO C -s

08 ^^ »H

^ O ^

©

06

o 2

-♦J "

^ S'

-4.3 W*

OQ ^

O fl

-♦J 'I-I

03 ^

« czJ

08

0)

• •

o

08

a

a

o

08

%a

c« .S

OQ

•♦.a

;5 el o 5.

^ '^ ^ rr?

^ -a •- 5^

^ cj IP •»-*

© O O ro

>5

OQ

Q

u
o

(N

OQ

C ^

••\

S

rO CO

2 o

©

08

• 1-4

tzi

08

S

•

1

1

• f^

•

55

pq

Kd

ic3

Ph

1

1

I I
i 1

s

I

I

,, ^ -S .>> .;::?^ ^

CO
00

^ ."t5 -S .^ g- s

.>• ©^08 a^so.

08 A a*^ a d S.

jQ 08 08 08 c8 C8 98 .

'I.-§ 3

U

[ 73 ]

CO

A4

9
0>

CO

a

o
c

o

o

I

n3

o

O
03

m

€8

i

ic3

1 I i

a

II— t

OS

03

»^

03
>^

>•
03

O

u
o

I

I

i

Id)

i

I

io3

I

03

03

o

o

0?

a

t3

eS O

^ '3 "rs

08 'a

2 ^ a
a - "

O
O

bC

€3 08

•r* -*J _Q

•T3

P "^
•73 o

© <^

© •

O S

^ 08

T3 >-»

© 'C

© ••

o ©

>>

00,

s:

©

o

V
a

.a

• ic3

be >

© fH.

OS

S

p

- 1

© •Fi^

be ^

o8 '^

pS >

P

ic3

I I

o

>;p o o ^

« P i3 5 • -
o^ o^ts ^ q-

KO 1^ 08 o3 q

p4 ;^ p4 &« «o

J a ^ o o -2 a
-S a ^ b b ««* -5

^ bo^ o fl bc a

o
© *^

i

o

P c

©.So

o g ^

S ^ 'I.

M ® tf

5S •*- p

p © a

© TI 1^

ti q3

• >^

O ©

94 ^

94 H

08
P

•2 ^

-^ S

q 08

o o

P fc->

i P

p 08

CO (»

o
o

a,

© ^

2 5^

O- OB
P4 J3
08 (-■

©

bO ^

§ ■= >

08 0) i-H

>> ^ Pm

"S © SZi

» -3

o ^

CQ O

a ©

f

p

08
bC

CO

m

p

CO

a

08

bfl
o

3

.2 sfi

*^ p

X ©

© JO,

.. H

S "^

08

ol O

X bO

<*4

^ ©

P
03

©

a
©

S .2

^ 2
p u

QQ O

08 ®

s a

© ^

CD

C4 §

©

p '^

o ^

&4 P

S • P

o 2

© S

M p

08 -*^

S '5*

P

OQ

2 S

© ^

CQ

o
bO

P

00
P4

[ 80 ]

[ 8i 3

7th, things opposed to one another : ex. namarOpam (S. natnarQpam), the
name and the form ; samathavipassanam, (S Qamatha + vipa^yana),
tranquilitj and spiritual insight ;

8th, individuals of different sexes : ex. dasidasam (S. dasidasam), the
n7ale and female slave ;

9th, adjectives derived Jrom numerals iQX. dukatikam(S. dvika + trika),
by twos and threes ;

10th, names of inferior castes ; ex. sapakacandalaw (S. <?7acandalaw)
sapakas and candalas ; venarathakaraw (S. vena + rathakara) wicker-
workers and oar-makers ;

11th, names of the cardinal points: ex. pubbaparam (S. pQrvaparam)
east and west ; adharattara;/) (S. adharottara/Ti), north and south.

229. There are optionally placed in the singular or plural
dvandvas composed of :

1st, names of trees ; ex. afisatthakapitthawi or assatthakapittha (S. a(?-
vattha + kapittha) ; the Fious Beligiosa (the Bo-tree) and Feronia
Elephantom ;

2nd, names of herbs ; ex. kasakusam or kasaku&a (S. ku<;aka<;am or kuQa-
kasah) ; the Saccharum Spontaneum grass and the Foa Cy nosuroidea
or sacrifioial grass ;

Srd, names of domestic animals ; ex. gomahisam or gomahisa (S, goma*
hisham or gomahishah) oows and buffaloes ; ajelokam or ajelaka
(S. ajaidakaw) sheep and goats ;

4th, names (attributes ?) of divinities ; ex. jataruparajatam or jatarQ-
parajatani (S. rajatajatarQpa) golden and silvern ;

5th, names of gramineous plants ; ex. saliyavaw or saliyava (S. ?ali-
yava) ; xioe and barley ;

6th, flames of countries ; ex. aAgamagadham or aftgamagadhS (S,
angamagadha) ; Bengal and Southern Bihar ;

7th, words forming an antithesis ; ex. kusalakusalam or kusalakusala
(S. ku^ala, aku^ala), good and bad ; ahorattam or ahoratta
(S. ahoratra), day and night ;

8th, names of birds; hawsabakam or hamsabaka (S. hat^)0a; vaka),
a goose and a orane.

[ 82 ]

2. Tappttrisa [Dependent Compounds].

S30. The fint member of these compounds is susceptible of
taking the place of different cases :

Isiy the Accusative:

ex. saranagatOj-ta^-tam (S. ^aranagata); who places himself under

protection ;
eukhappatto (S. sukhaprapta), who has obtained happiness ;
sabbarattisobhano, i. e. sabbaratti;/) sobhano^ fine the whole night

(S. sarvaratra 9obhana);
saccavadi, i. e. saccam vaditum silam assa it is in his nature to speak

the truth (S. satyavadin).

2nd, the Instnmentive :
ex. buddhabhasito dhammo, the law taught by Buddha (S buddha,
bhashita) ; kakapeyya nadi (S. kakapeya nadi), a river that a crow
P. 87. could exhaust in drinking ; P. 118

piyavippayogo (S. priyaviprayoga), the separation of his friend ;
padapo (S. padapa), that drinks with the feet = a tree ;
masapubbo (S. masapQr-vah^, a or the former month j
matusadiso (S. matrisadriQah), like his mother ;
asikalaho (S. asikalaha), a combat with a sword ;
Tacanipufio (S. vannipuno), skilful with his words ;
jaccandho (S. jatyandha), blind from birth.

Srdy the Dative :

(a) when the second member designates a thing attributed to or
destined for that which the first member expresses ; ex,

kathinadussam (S. kathina, dQshya), stuff for a kathina (a priestly
robe made from raw cotton within a single day as a meritorious act) ;
saAghabhattam (S. sangha, bhakta), dinner for the clergy :

(b) when the second member is attha (S. artha) ; ex.
bhikkbusanghattho viharo (S. bhikshu, saAgha, artha), a vihdra

(monastery) for the meeting of the {Sangha) Buddhist clergy,

{Note, This kind of compound may naturally affect the three
genders) ;

(o) when the second member is hita (S. hita) ; ex.
lokahito (S. loka^ hita); who is useful to the world ;

. mf.'.

t 88 ]

(d) when the sec&nd member is deyya (S. deya) ; ex.
buddhadeyyam puppham (S. buddha, deya, pushpa), a flower worthy
of being offered to Buddha :

iih, ike Ablative ?

(a) when the second member expresses separation ; ex.
methunapeto (S. maithuna, apela), who abstains from sexual intercourse ;
palapapagato (S. pralapa, apagata), who is guarded against gossip;
nagaraniggato (S, nagara, nirgata), departed from the town ;
rukkhaggapatito (S. vriksha, agra, patita), fallen from the top of a tree;

(b) when the second term is bhayam (S. bhaya), fear ; bhito (S.
bhita) frightened ; or bMntko, timid ; ex.

corabhayawj (S. caurabhayam), fear of thieves;
papabhito (S. papa, bhita), who fears sin ;
papabhiruko, who fears sin :

(c) when the second member is rirati (S. virati) ; ex.
kayaduccaritavirati (S.^kaya, duQcarita, virati) abstention from corpo-
real sins :

(d) when the second member is mutto (S. mukta) or mokkho
(S. moksha) ; ex.

bandhanamutto (S. bandhana, mukta) delivered from bonds ;
bandhanamokkho (S* bandhana, moksha), deliverance from bonds :

5 if A, the Genitive :
ex. rajapuriso (S. raja, purusha), the servant of a king ;
acariyapiijako (S. acarya, pujaka), who respects a teacher.

Note, 1. Roja^ sakhi, etc. have two stems when they are used
as the last member of £l tappurisa :

88. (a) a stem in a ; ex. devarajo, devasakho, plur. devaraj^i deva-

sakha, ace* sing, devarajaw, ace, plur, devaraje ;

(b) a stem in an; ex. devaraja, devasakha; plur. devarajanOi

devasakhano*

Note, 2. Puma (S. puws) loses its a; ex. pulliiigo (S. pumliA*
ga), the masculine gender; pumbhavo (S. puwbhava);

i and ^i at the end of the first member, may, at will^ be shortened ; ex.
itthirOpam (S. stri, rQpa), the form of a woman ;
bhikkhunisaftgho (S. bhikshun!, saftgha), a community of nuns;
jambusakha (S. jambhu; Qakha), a branch of the Jambu tree :

[ 84 ]

6th, the Locative :
ex. rQpasafifia (9. rQpa, samjiia.) ; consoioosness of form ;
arannavaso (S. aranyavasa), dwelling in the woods ;
oakkhuviuiiaQam (S. oakshus, vijuana), ocular knowledge i
vikalabhojanam (S. yikalabhojanam) eating at an unusual hour (the

night) ;
avatakacchapo (avatakaochapa), a tortoise in a hole ;
kapamanduko (S. kupamanddka), a frog in a well ;
akkhadhutto (S. aksha, dhQrta), play at dioe ; etc.

231. The last member of these oompounds may be taken in tho
sense of the ace. and that of the other cases :

1st, the Accusative :
with ati (S. ati), pati (S. prati), anu (S. anu) for the^rs^ member;
ex. aocantaw, acoantani (S. atyanta), what goes beyond limits ;
ativelo (S. ati vela), excessive ;
paccakkho,-a,-a»a (S. pratyaksha), evident ;

anvattham (S. anvartha), comprehensible, conformable with reason ;
pattajiviko (S. praptajivika), apannajlviko (S. apannajivika), who has

the means of existence.

2ndf the Instrumentive :
ex. (a) avakokilafT) vanam, i. e. kokilaya avakuttham (S. avakrushta)

pariooattafTf, a wood deserted by the nightingale (S. avakokila) ;
pariyajjhano, i.e. ajjhayanaya parigilaao (S. paryadhyayanah, parig-

lano 'dhyayanena), weakened by study ;
(b) with didm for the first member;
ex. alamkammo (S. alam, karman), apt for business; kamuassa alaiTi

samattho (S, samartha).

3rd, the Ablative :
ex. nikkosambi (S. nishkaushambi), departed from Kosambi;
nibbana^/i (S. nirvana). Nibban ;
nibbano (S. nirvana), i. e. vanato nikkhantam, gone from the forest,

4th, the Ablative ;
P. 89, with the following words for the^rs^ member : pa (S. pra), upari (S.

upari), hettha (from S. adhas), anto (S, antar); ex,
pacariyo, i. e. acariyato pare (S. praoarya), who follows his teacher (a
pupil) \

C 85 J

uparigafiga (S. upari, gaftga), upon the Ganges ;
hetthanadi, down the river ;

antosamapatti (S. antar^ samapatti), pending the samdpatii (a sort of
ascetic practice).

232. The subordinate word may be placed last,

(1) optionally ; ex. rajahamso (S. rajahamsa or hamsaraja), a goose;
addhamasam or masaddham (S. ardhamasa), a half-month ; eto»
or {'2)deferminately ; ex.

addhakahapanam (S. ardha, karshapana), a half-kahdpana ;
addhamasaka/;) (S. ardha, mashaka) a half-rndsaka^
addharattaw (S. ardharatra), midnight ; ^'*

pubbaratta/Ti (S. purvaratra), the first part of the night ;
apararattam (S. apararatra), the second part of the night j
pubbanham (S. purvabna), morning ;
sayanham (S. sayahna), evening.

233. Sometimes, the first member casually preserves an inflex ion
(alopa-tappunso i. e. a Tappurisa not having the inflection cut of ox with
it present)^ (S. aluksamasa) ; ex.

Is^, the Accusative :
pubha^/jkaro (S. prabhakaro), the sun ;
amatamdado (S. amritadada), the bestower of immortality j
jutindharo (S. dyutidhara), having brightness ;

2wd, the Instrumentive :
sahasakatam (S. saha&akritam), done with haste ;

3rd^ the Dative :
parassapadam (S. parasmaipadam), the parassapada voice ; attano«
padam (S. atmanepadaw) the attanopada voice ;

ithf the Ablative:
bhayatuppatthana»a (S. bhaya, upasthana), succour against fear (lit.

from fear) ;
paratoghoso (S. paratas, ghosha), a distant voice (lit. a voice from the

distance) ;

hth, the Genitive:
gavampatitthero (S. gavawpati, sthavira), the (thera) priest of Qa«
vampati (literally, the herdsman) ;

[ 86 3

6th, the Locative t '

manaslkaro (S. maaasikara), laying to heart (Bothliagk and Both'0
Sanskrit Diet.) ; ;

pubbenivasanussati (S. purvanivaaanusmritl)) remembranoe of a
former existenoe ;

antevasi (S. antevasin), a pupil ;

kantbekalo (S. kanthekala), blue-neoked ;

urasilomo (S. urasiloman), hairy-breasted.

3. KammadhIraya (S. Karmadharata).
[Descriptive or Determinative Compounds].

234. In these compounds the word mahanta (S. mahat) has
P. 90« 1st, the form mahd : ex. mahapuriso (S. mahapurusha), a great man ;

2nd, the form maha^ i. e. the Sanskrit word mahat^ because the first
consonant of the following word is reduplicated after maha : ex.
mahabbhaya^/» (S. mahadbhayam), great fright.

235. Santa (S. sat), being, takes the ancient form sa which
causes the reduplication of the initial consonant of the following word
(then sa = S^ sat), ex. sappuriso (S. satpurusha), a sincere man.

236. Puma (S. puws) rejects its a (i. e. it reappears under its
old form : ex. pumkokilo (S.' pumskokila), punnago (S. pumnaga)^
(Cf §§ 59, and 230).

237. The first member is not put in the feminine, when the
aecond aUo would be a feminine noun : ex. khattiyakaHHa = khattiya +
kanna (S. kshatriya, kanya), a girl of the warrior caste ; kumarasamani
(S. kumara^ramana),

238. Kammadhdraya compounds are of several kinds ;

1st, the first member determines the second .' ex.
pubbapuriso (S. pQrvapurusha), the front man ;

aparapuriso (S. aparapurusha), the other man ;
pathamapuriso (S. prathamapurusha), the first man ;

4

majjhimapuriso (S. madhyamapurusha), the middle man ;
virapuriso (S. virapurusha), the hero;
kanhasappo (S. krishnasarpa, the black snake ;
niluppalam (S. nilotpalaw), the blue lotus ; etc :

2nd, the second member determines the firsti i. e. the words there

r 8T ]

(S. fiathavira); dcariyo (S. aoarya); vcmi&t \ pandiio (S. pandita), a learned
man ; etc : ex.

Sariputtathero, the priest eariputta ;
BuddhaghofiaoariyOy the teacher Guddhaghosa ;
VidhOrapandito, the scholar VidhQra :

91. Zrd, the two members are determinate ; ex.

situnha;;} (S. <;^rtai ushna), heat and cold ;

uocavaoam (S, ucoavaoa), high and low ; P. 121.

gatapaocagatam (S. gatapratyagata), gone and returned : ^
4^A, the word in apposition is put in the second place : ex.
munipungavo (S. munipuftgava), ascetic-hero ;
buddhadicco (S. buddha, aditya), Buddha-sun :
samanapundariko (id. (ramana, pundarika), samana-lotus :

5ih, ihejirst member indicates the origin : ex.

dhammasanua (S. dharmasamjua), consciousness coming from

the law;
dhammabuddhi (S. dharmabuddhi), knowledge arising out of
the law :
6/A, the^rs^ member specifies a general term : ex.

cakkhundriyaw (S. cakshurindriya), the faculty of sight ;
gunadhanam (S. guna, dhana), wealth of good qualities ;
7f7i, the^rs^ member is a negative, na being replaced by «, before
i)Otcels by an : ex.

abrahmano (S. abrahmana) not a brahman ;
avyakata (S. avyakrita) that are undefined (laws) ;
akusalo (S. akuQala) the bad man ;
anasso (S. anagva), not a horse :

8th, the first member is ku (before vowels iad)y a particle
expressive of disparagement, and id, signifying little : ex.
kuputto (S. kuputra), a bad son ;
kadannam (S. kadannam), bad nourishment ;

92. kapuriso (S. kapurusha), a bad man ;

kalavanam (S. kalavanam) little salt :

9th, the first member ia pa (S. pra), etc: ex. — 1. pavacanam
(S. pravacana) the Buddhist Scriptures ; 2. samadhauam (S* samadhana)
fielf absorption ; 3. vikappo (S. vikalpa) option; 4« atidevo. (S. atideva) a

i 88 ]

supreme deva (?) 5. adhidevo(S. adhideva) a superior deva (?); 6. sugandho
(B. sugandha) fragrance ; 7. dukkata;;* (S. dushkrita) a Biuful act, a ein ; etc.

4. DiGU (S. DviGu) [Numeral or Collective Compounds], P. 121

239. The digu takes the inflexion of the neuter singular^ and its
fint member is a numeral adjective equally in the neuter singular ; ex.

tilokam (S. triloka), the three worlds ;

tidandam (S. tridanda, the three staves of a mendicant.

240. To enter into this kind of compound; a word sometimes
changes its suffix and assumes the suffix a : ex.

dvirattam (S. dviratram), two nights ;
dvangulam (S. dvyaftgulam), two fingers ;
tivafigulam (S. tryafigulaw), three fingers ;
paiicagavam (S. paficagavam), five cows.

241. The digu may not express a whole. In that cas^, it is not
restricted to the neuter gender, singular number ; ex.

tibhava (S. tri + bhava), three forms of existence;
catuddisa (S. caturdigam), the four countries ; ,
ekapuggalo (S. eka, pudgala), a single individual.

5. Bahubbihi (S. Bahuvrihi) [Relative Compounds].

242. There are nine sorts of Bahubbihi :

Isti bahubbihi consisting of two words and communicating to the
word that it determines, the sense

(a) of the accusative •• ex,

P. 93, agatasamano sangharamo (S. agata, ^ramana), the monastery

garden into which the Samanas are come ;

(b) of the instrumentive : ex.

vigitamaro bhagava (S. vijita, mara), the Master, vanquisher
of Mara ;

(c) of the dative : ex.

upanitabhojano samano (S. upanfta, bhojana, ^ramana), the
Samana to whom food was given ;

(d) of the ablative : ex.

niggatajano gamo (S. nirgata, jana, grama), the village
whose inhabitants are gone ;

(e) of the genitive : ex.

vitarago (S. vigata, raga), the man without passions. ' '

i: 89 J

The first member may be

(1) a numeral adjective : ex.

pancacakkliu (= Bhagava), he who possesses fire eyes (= the

Master) ;
tidasa (=deva), (S. trida9ali), the thirty (three) = (the gods) ;

(2) a pronoun : ex.

idappaoayo (S. idam partyaya), having this for a cause ;
kimpabhavo (S. kiw, prabhava) , having what origin ;

(3) a particle : ex.

Bugandham candanam (S. sugandha, candana), the sandal-
wood which has a good smell.

Noti. In 8ome hahuhbihi compounds, the 'determining word may
be placed indifferently, either at the beginning or at the end : ex.

jatachando (S. jata, chanda) or chandajato, he who has no P. 123 •

desire ;
masajato or jatamaso (3. masa, jata), a month old ;
ohinnahattho or hatthachinno (S. hastai, ohinna), one whose

hands are cut off ;

(f) the nford determined by hahubUhi has the sense of the
locative : ex.

sulabhapindo deso (S. sulabha, pinda, de^a), a country in
which alms are easily obtained :

2nd, hahuhbihi whose determining word is taken in the sense of
different cases : ex.

ekarattivaso (8. ekaratra, vasa), he who receives a habitation

for one night, i. e« ekarattim vaso assa ;
dandiapani (S. dandapani), he who holds a staff in his hand ;

irdj bahubbihi composed of three words : ex.

onitapattapani (S. avanita, patra, pani) i. e. onlto pattato

pan! yena; he who has withdrawn his hank from the

didh, [i. e. finished his meal] ;
Bihapubbaddhakayo (S. siwhapurvardhakSyak, Cf. Burnouf^

Lotus of the Good Law, p. 669), he whose body's hinder

part resembles that of a lion ;

t 90 3

4iih, hahuhhUiiy whose first member is the negative a, an ; ex.
aputrako (S. aputraka), who has not a son ;
anuttaro (S. anuttara), he whom none excels :
f>ih, bahuhUhi whose first member is saha (S. sa) : ex.

fiaparivs,ro or sahaparivaro (S. saha, parivara), who is with

his attendants ;
sahetuko or sahetu (B* saha, hetu), who has a cause :
P. 91. Qthy bahubbihi, whose first part is the name of an assimilated

thing : ex.

nigrodhaparimandalo rSjakums*ro (S. njagrodhaparimandalai
having a thread along his girth: ? B. & B's Commentary
— kayavjamanam samappamanataya nigrodho iva pari-
mandalo yo rajakumaro), a prince who has the girth of the
tree called Fictis Indica, (the Indian fig or banyan tree) :

7tfi, bahubbihi, each of whose parts contains the name of a
number: ex.

dvihatiham (S. dvyaha, tryaha), who has two or three days ;
dvattipatta, who has two or three dishes :
8ih, bahubbihi, each of whose parts contains the name of a cardinal
point to indicate an intervening direction : ex.

pubbadakkhina vidisa, the south-eastern direction ;
pubbuttara (S. purvottara) the north-eastern direction :
9th, bahubbihi, each of whose members strengthens the name of the
instrument or that of the means of combat : ex.

kesakesi (S. keijake^i), who strikes on seizing his adversary
by the hair (kesesu kesesu gahetva idam yuddhaw pavat-
teti, Of. E'dpasiddhi) ;
dandadandi (S. dandadandi), who is beaten with a stafF.
243. In bahuhbihi compounds, the first member loses the 9ufh of
the femimney if the two members are virtually in the same case and if the
first word is susceptible of being placed in the masculine. We accordingly
have dighajaftgho (S. dirghajaftghah) ,long-legged (i. e. digha jaAgha yassa,.
he whose legs are long) ; but saddhadhuro (S. ^raddha, dhura), full
of faith, or khamadhano (S. kshama, dhana), rich in patience*

Note, Mah& is placed first : ex. mahapafifio (S* mahaprajfla), F, 1S4«
very wise-

t 91 ]

244. Sometimes the suffix d is added to the words dhanu (S.
dhanus), a bow ; dhamma (S. dharma); law ; and to others also,, when they
eooupy the second place : ex.

garidivadhanva (S» gandivadhanTaw), a name of Arjuna

(Cf.§81.)j
paccakkhadhamma (S. pratjaksha, dharma), he to whom the
law is evident ; but sahassatthamadhanu (S. sahasrai
sthaman, dhanus) [he who has a bow that requires the
Btrength of a thousand to draw it (?)] and paccakkha-
dhammo are also used.

S45. Feminine nouns in ^, r^, and stemB in iu (S. tri) take tbe^
suffix ha^ when thej are placed last; ex.

05. b ahukumarikam kula;^ (S. bahukumSirika); a family in which

there are many girh ;
bahukattuko deso (S. bahukartrika) a country in which there
are many active persons*

6. AvTAYiBHlvA (S. Avyayi-bhata) [Adveebial Indeclinable Compounds.]

246. These compounds are always neuter and have for their first
member one of the npasagga (prepositional) and nipdta (indeclinable) particles*

If the stem of the last member is an a, the compcund has am for :
its inflexion (neut. sing. acc.)> ex^

upakumbhaw (S. upakumbhajw) ; close to the pot ;

if the stem of the last member has a long vowel, d is replaced
by am and the other totcels are shortened : ex.

upagaftgam (S. upagaftgam), near the Ganges ;:

adhikumari, for the young damsel ;

upavadhu; near his wife* /

247* These compounds may take all the case inflexiona r

ex. Isty^upanagara (or upanagaramah, upanagarasma), anaya^ '
brought from the vicinity of the town, or upanagarehi.

2nd, upanagaram santakam, who is close to the town or upana*
garassa.

3rd^ upanagaram nidhehi, a larking hole near the town ; or npa-
nagare (upanagaramhi, upanagarasmim, npanagaresn).

[ 92 ]

248. Besides proximity (Cf § 246. ex. 2.), these componnda
express,

1st, negation ; 2nd, absence : ex. niddaratthar?! (S. daratha), dara«
thSnam abhavo, absence of truth ; nitnmasakaw (S. ma^aksi), without gnats ;

3rd, the act of following : ex. anuratham (S. anuratham) in tho
train of the chariot, or behind the chariot.

4th, conformity : ex. anurupaw (S. anurQpaw) conformably with
a figure ;

5th, division : ex. attanam attanampati, for each person ; pae«
cattam (S. pratyatmaw) ; anvaddhamasa^i, for each half month (S. ana,
ardhamasa) ;

6th, succession : ex. anujetthaw (S. anujyeshthaw), in order of
age;
P. 96. 7th, opposition: ex. patisotaw (8. pratisrotas) with a counter-

current ;

8th, limit, point of departure : ex. apanakotikaw (S. panagosh- P. 185
thika ?), as far as the watering place ;

akuraaram (S. akumaraw), since childhood, [lit. up to the
time of being a child'] ;
9th, a flourishing condition ; ex. subhikkhavf (S . su, bhiksha),
abundance of food ;

10th, relation : ex. ajjhaltdm (S. adhyatmam), with reference to
the soul, to the body.

249. The following particles may form the first member :

1st, yatha (S. yatha) in the measure of, as : ex. yathasatti (S.
yatha^akti), in the measure of his forces ;

2nd, yava (S. yavat) as much as: ex. yavadatthaw (S. yavadar-
tham), as much as is necessary ;

3rd, tiro (S. tiras), across : ex. tiropakaram (S. tirasprakara),
across the hedge ;

4th9 anto (S. antar), to the interior : ex, antonagaram (S. antar,
nagaram), into the town ;

5th, bahi (S. vahis), without, out of : ex. bahinagarawt (S. Yahis-
nagaram), out of the town ;

6th, upari (S. upari), over : ex. uparlpasadaw (S. prasada) over
the palactd S

L 93 ]

7th, hettha (S. adhas), below: ex. hetthapasadaw, below the
palace ;

8th, pure (S. puras, pura), before, up to : ex. purebhattaw (S.
bhakta), before the repast, until the repast ;

9th, paccha (S. paQcat, paQca), after, ex, pacchabhattam, after
the repast ;

10th, sa (S. sa), with : ex. samakkhikam (S. makshika) bhuujati,
he eats with the flies ;

11th, ora (S. avara), to the bottom of : ex. oragafigafn (S. ot&m
gangaya), to the mouths of the Ganges.

(The eompounds-Dvandva, Tappurisa, Kammadharaya, Digu, and
Bahubbihi — may be said to be formed relatively, when the sense of a rela*
tive is implied. K T.)*

THB Bl^D

POSTSCRIPT.

This grammar, whose translation from the French was taken in
hand with the kind permission of M. Stanislas, Guyard and finished in
1878 but laid aside on reconsideration becanse it did not appear likelr
that it would have as wide a field of usefulness as was at first anticipated
for it, is now published under more favourable circumstances.

All that is wished for it is, that it may prove as useful as it is con-
sidered to be : and if one thing more than another might be deemed a
ground for encouragement to hope it will prove so, it is its adoption in the
Kangoon High School by the Professor of Pdli. as a text hook.

There is no question that M. MinayefF's work on P41i Grammar is
the most thorough yet issued and if the rendering from the French be found
faithful and the work extensively useful, the expectation of the translator
Will have been attained.

The grammar is in a measure comparative owing to Sanskrit
equivalents being given of nearly all the PAli words employed but this
circumstance need be no hindrance to the study of the book even in lower
forms of schools, as, beyond observing, in passing, the close resemblance
existing between the two kinds of speech, no notice need be taken of the
Sanscrit equivalents.

The Sanskrit equivalents will however in Bnrma serve the very
useful purpose of dispelling from the minds of the Burmese any suspicion
of the celestial nature of Pali, and of showing it to be a Hinduic dialect
which the translator is disposed to believe was the ancient lingua franca
of Hindustan Proper during certain very remote prae-Mahammadan times.
For, to him it appears, a large proportion of the words of Hinduic origin
which go to form, with the admixture of Persian and Arabic, the modern
lingtia franca oi Hindustan Proper y consists of such as decidedly have the
Tuscan smoothness and stemi^nal mould of P&li rather than the ruofoedoess

■eso'

of Sanskrit and there could not have been the survival of so large a propor-
tion had not the commonly spoken dialect of the people of Hindustan
Proper in those ancient times been Pali or rather Magadhi, the language
of Magadha, whose kings once reigned supreme over Hindustan Proper.

The additions and modifications were an afterthought. Nearly
all the additional matter is enclosed within square brackets. The modifica-
tions are chiefly confined to arrangement and will, it is hoped, be found
suitable. The translator has desired to be the humble reproducer of the
expressions of the author from whose scholarship he would be sorry to
detract anything.

Unusual and unavoidable delays have for months retarded the
publication of the book, the result of night-work and, notwithstanding
much care, oversights have been detected which will be found emended
in the Table of Errata appended hereto.

CHAS. GEO. ADAMS.

Maulmain,

12(/i Ma?

ERRATA.

Introduction, p. 1. 1. 17. read 'primitively'; p. li. 1. 23. read
' primitive ', 1. 31. dele'Sj after * knowing ' and * was ', and 1. 3^. dele, after
* knowing ' ; p. iii. 1. 13 read ' meantime', 1. 31. dele, after * myths ' ; p.
viii. 1. 7. read *Tabernae montana', note (w) 1. 1. read 'in quo ', and 1. 3.
read * every thing ' ; p. ix. 1. 25. read ' Mandhatassa ' ; p. xii. 1. 15. read
•northern part; p. xiv. 11. 10, 11, read ''Let the Brahman speak not at all
indistinctly "; p. xr. 1. 8. read 'society', 1. 13. dele, after 'society ', and
1. 20. read ' Yaska ' ; p. xvi. 1. 6. read ' second ', 1. 16. read ' instructions',
1. 24. read * compliments ' ; p. xviii. 1. 2, read *from the palace ' ; p. xxiii.
1. 31. read 'MagadW ; p. xxiv. 1. 4. read ^athdyo' ; p. xxvi. 1. 7. bracket

the words 'the Sanskrit Pali d ' ; p. xxxii. 1, 25. read 'Jdtakas^;

p. xxxiv. 1. 12. read ' attendants ' ; p. xxxvii, 1. 18. in lieu of the hyphen
put a dash after ' saint ' ; p. xli. 1. 6. read ' sprang'.

Qrammar. p. 3. para (B) read 'lit.' ; p. 5. 1. 2. read ' purush-
anaw ', I. 11. read 'S. punar) again*, ; p. 10. read 'a hiatus ' ; p. 13. 1. 3.
read ' Whoever', opposite. 1. 18. on the right note P. 56; p. 14. opposite
§ 45. on the left note P. 12 ; p. 15. opposite 1. 5. on the right nofe P. 57 ;
1. 19. read 'inflexion', opposite. 1. 24. on the left note P. 13 j p. 16*
opposite § 53. on the left note P. 14, and opposite 1. 12. on the right note
P. 58 ; p. 18. opposite 1. 1. on the right note P. 59, opposite 1. 6. on the
left note P. 15, and read 'ex. ito nSyati ', 1. 12 read 'Letters', 1. 26.
read 'brumi'; p. 19. opp. 1. 11. on the left note P. 16, and opp. I. 15.
on the right note P. 60 ; p. 20 opp. 1. 6. on the left note P. 17, and opp.
1. 19. on the right note P. 61; p. 23. 1. 13. read 'cittani' ; p. 30. 1. 13.
read ' ayu ' ; p. 49. 1. 19. read ' south-eastern ' for * southern ' ; p. 51. 1. 6.

«

read ' are like '; p. 54. last line, read 'inflexional ;' p. 65. § 183. read THE
Aorist'; p. 67. § 187. 1. 3. read 'hare' before ^agamasi,' last line in-
vert letter m in the word from'; p. 73. 1. 13. read 'the suffixes ', 1. 26.
read ' the suffixes ', and dele the following * of ' ; p. 79. !• IQ. at the begin-
ning of the sentence note ' 219.' ; p. 82. 1. 10. read • assa,'; p. 86. 1. 24.
read ' kaiiiia ' ; p. 87. 1. 1^ read * S, sthavira ', and 1. 3, read * Sariputta ';
p. 88. 1. 27. read * vijitamaro ; p. 89. 1. 7. read 'pratyaya ', 1. 30. read 'his
hand ', 1. 31. read ' dish '.

It tcould be well if the errors xcere corrected before the book u
used, C. G. A.

fMHIIP

THE BORROWER WILL BE CHARGED
AN OVERDUE FEE IF THIS BOOK IS
NOT RETURNED TO THE LIBRARY ON
OR BEFORE THE LAST DATE STAMPED
BELOW. NON-RECEtPT OF OVERDUE
NOTICES DOES NOT EXEMPT THE
BORROWER FROM OVERDUE FEES.